diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
180 files changed, 8231 insertions, 1597 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 49c0513..f54273e 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -270,8 +270,6 @@ preempt-locking.txt - info on locking under a preemptive kernel. printk-formats.txt - how to get printk format specifiers right -prio_tree.txt - - info on radix-priority-search-tree use for indexing vmas. ramoops.txt - documentation of the ramoops oops/panic logging module. rbtree.txt diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj deleted file mode 100644 index 9a3cb88..0000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -What: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj -When: August 2012 -Why: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's - badness heuristic used to determine which task to kill when the kernel - is out of memory. - - The badness heuristic has since been rewritten since the introduction of - this tunable such that its meaning is deprecated. The value was - implemented as a bitshift on a score generated by the badness() - function that did not have any precise units of measure. With the - rewrite, the score is given as a proportion of available memory to the - task allocating pages, so using a bitshift which grows the score - exponentially is, thus, impossible to tune with fine granularity. - - A much more powerful interface, /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj, was - introduced with the oom killer rewrite that allows users to increase or - decrease the badness score linearly. This interface will replace - /proc/<pid>/oom_adj. - - A warning will be emitted to the kernel log if an application uses this - deprecated interface. After it is printed once, future warnings will be - suppressed until the kernel is rebooted. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index c1eb41c..279da08 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -206,3 +206,17 @@ Description: when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and the result of reading a discarded area is undefined. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/write_same_max_bytes +Date: January 2012 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Some devices support a write same operation in which a + single data block can be written to a range of several + contiguous blocks on storage. This can be used to wipe + areas on disk or to initialize drives in a RAID + configuration. write_same_max_bytes indicates how many + bytes can be written in a single write same command. If + write_same_max_bytes is 0, write same is not supported + by the device. + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd index 3c17b62..1cf2adf 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd @@ -25,6 +25,10 @@ client_id The ceph unique client id that was assigned for this specific session. +features + + A hexadecimal encoding of the feature bits for this image. + major The block device major number. @@ -33,6 +37,11 @@ name The name of the rbd image. +image_id + + The unique id for the rbd image. (For rbd image format 1 + this is empty.) + pool The name of the storage pool where this rbd image resides. @@ -57,12 +66,6 @@ current_snap The current snapshot for which the device is mapped. -create_snap - - Create a snapshot: - - $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_create - snap_* A directory per each snapshot @@ -79,4 +82,7 @@ snap_size The size of the image when this snapshot was taken. +snap_features + + A hexadecimal encoding of the feature bits for this snapshot. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46badc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +What: /sys/devices/.../firmware_node/ +Date: September 2012 +Contact: <> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../firmware_node directory contains attributes + allowing the user space to check and modify some firmware + related properties of given device. + +What: /sys/devices/.../firmware_node/description +Date: September 2012 +Contact: Lance Ortiz <lance.ortiz@hp.com> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../firmware/description attribute contains a string + that describes the device as provided by the _STR method in the ACPI + namespace. This attribute is read-only. If the device does not have + an _STR method associated with it in the ACPI namespace, this + attribute is not present. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 index f22ac08..c631253 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 @@ -96,3 +96,16 @@ Contact: "Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu> Description: The maximum number of megabytes the writeback code will try to write out before move on to another inode. + +What: /sys/fs/ext4/<disk>/extent_max_zeroout_kb +Date: August 2012 +Contact: "Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu> +Description: + The maximum number of kilobytes which will be zeroed + out in preference to creating a new uninitialized + extent when manipulating an inode's extent tree. Note + that using a larger value will increase the + variability of time necessary to complete a random + write operation (since a 4k random write might turn + into a much larger write due to the zeroout + operation). diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index cb9258b..495e5ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -454,6 +454,16 @@ The preferred style for long (multi-line) comments is: * with beginning and ending almost-blank lines. */ +For files in net/ and drivers/net/ the preferred style for long (multi-line) +comments is a little different. + + /* The preferred comment style for files in net/ and drivers/net + * looks like this. + * + * It is nearly the same as the generally preferred comment style, + * but there is no initial almost-blank line. + */ + It's also important to comment data, whether they are basic types or derived types. To this end, use just one data declaration per line (no commas for multiple data declarations). This leaves you room for a small comment on each diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 196b8b9..b030052 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -6,11 +6,36 @@ <bookinfo> <title>Linux DRM Developer's Guide</title> + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>Jesse</firstname> + <surname>Barnes</surname> + <contrib>Initial version</contrib> + <affiliation> + <orgname>Intel Corporation</orgname> + <address> + <email>jesse.barnes@intel.com</email> + </address> + </affiliation> + </author> + <author> + <firstname>Laurent</firstname> + <surname>Pinchart</surname> + <contrib>Driver internals</contrib> + <affiliation> + <orgname>Ideas on board SPRL</orgname> + <address> + <email>laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com</email> + </address> + </affiliation> + </author> + </authorgroup> + <copyright> <year>2008-2009</year> - <holder> - Intel Corporation (Jesse Barnes <jesse.barnes@intel.com>) - </holder> + <year>2012</year> + <holder>Intel Corporation</holder> + <holder>Laurent Pinchart</holder> </copyright> <legalnotice> @@ -20,6 +45,17 @@ the kernel source COPYING file. </para> </legalnotice> + + <revhistory> + <!-- Put document revisions here, newest first. --> + <revision> + <revnumber>1.0</revnumber> + <date>2012-07-13</date> + <authorinitials>LP</authorinitials> + <revremark>Added extensive documentation about driver internals. + </revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> </bookinfo> <toc></toc> @@ -72,342 +108,361 @@ submission & fencing, suspend/resume support, and DMA services. </para> - <para> - The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_driver. Drivers - typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, - then pass it to drm_init() at load time. - </para> <!-- Internals: driver init --> <sect1> - <title>Driver initialization</title> - <para> - Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must - first create and fill out a struct drm_driver structure. - </para> - <programlisting> - static struct drm_driver driver = { - /* Don't use MTRRs here; the Xserver or userspace app should - * deal with them for Intel hardware. - */ - .driver_features = - DRIVER_USE_AGP | DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP | - DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ | DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED | DRIVER_MODESET, - .load = i915_driver_load, - .unload = i915_driver_unload, - .firstopen = i915_driver_firstopen, - .lastclose = i915_driver_lastclose, - .preclose = i915_driver_preclose, - .save = i915_save, - .restore = i915_restore, - .device_is_agp = i915_driver_device_is_agp, - .get_vblank_counter = i915_get_vblank_counter, - .enable_vblank = i915_enable_vblank, - .disable_vblank = i915_disable_vblank, - .irq_preinstall = i915_driver_irq_preinstall, - .irq_postinstall = i915_driver_irq_postinstall, - .irq_uninstall = i915_driver_irq_uninstall, - .irq_handler = i915_driver_irq_handler, - .reclaim_buffers = drm_core_reclaim_buffers, - .get_map_ofs = drm_core_get_map_ofs, - .get_reg_ofs = drm_core_get_reg_ofs, - .fb_probe = intelfb_probe, - .fb_remove = intelfb_remove, - .fb_resize = intelfb_resize, - .master_create = i915_master_create, - .master_destroy = i915_master_destroy, -#if defined(CONFIG_DEBUG_FS) - .debugfs_init = i915_debugfs_init, - .debugfs_cleanup = i915_debugfs_cleanup, -#endif - .gem_init_object = i915_gem_init_object, - .gem_free_object = i915_gem_free_object, - .gem_vm_ops = &i915_gem_vm_ops, - .ioctls = i915_ioctls, - .fops = { - .owner = THIS_MODULE, - .open = drm_open, - .release = drm_release, - .ioctl = drm_ioctl, - .mmap = drm_mmap, - .poll = drm_poll, - .fasync = drm_fasync, -#ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT - .compat_ioctl = i915_compat_ioctl, -#endif - .llseek = noop_llseek, - }, - .pci_driver = { - .name = DRIVER_NAME, - .id_table = pciidlist, - .probe = probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(drm_cleanup_pci), - }, - .name = DRIVER_NAME, - .desc = DRIVER_DESC, - .date = DRIVER_DATE, - .major = DRIVER_MAJOR, - .minor = DRIVER_MINOR, - .patchlevel = DRIVER_PATCHLEVEL, - }; - </programlisting> - <para> - In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver - sets several flags indicating what core features it supports; - we go over the individual callbacks in later sections. Since - flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM - core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init(). Some, - like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters, - but that's the exception rather than the rule. - </para> - <variablelist> - <title>Driver flags</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term> - <listitem><para> - Driver uses AGP interface - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term> - <listitem><para> - Driver needs AGP interface to function. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_USE_MTRR</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Driver uses MTRR interface for mapping memory. Deprecated. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term> - <listitem><para> - Driver is capable of PCI DMA. Deprecated. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_SG</term> - <listitem><para> - Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA. Deprecated. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term> - <listitem><para>Driver supports DMA. Deprecated.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term> - <listitem> - <para> - DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ - handler. DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & - handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of - PCI drivers). - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Should be set if the driver queues DMA requests and completes them - asynchronously. Deprecated. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_FB_DMA</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Driver supports DMA to/from the framebuffer. Deprecated. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRIVER_MODESET</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Driver supports mode setting interfaces. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - <para> - In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports - IRQs. DMA, as discussed later, is handled by device-specific ioctls - in this case. It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though - unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally - exports KMS capability. + <title>Driver Initialization</title> + <para> + At the core of every DRM driver is a <structname>drm_driver</structname> + structure. Drivers typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, + and then pass it to one of the <function>drm_*_init()</function> functions + to register it with the DRM subsystem. </para> - </sect1> - - <!-- Internals: driver load --> - - <sect1> - <title>Driver load</title> - <para> - In the previous section, we saw what a typical drm_driver - structure might look like. One of the more important fields in - the structure is the hook for the load function. - </para> - <programlisting> - static struct drm_driver driver = { - ... - .load = i915_driver_load, - ... - }; - </programlisting> - <para> - The load function has many responsibilities: allocating a driver - private structure, specifying supported performance counters, - configuring the device (e.g. mapping registers & command - buffers), initializing the memory manager, and setting up the - initial output configuration. - </para> - <para> - If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over - to the new interfaces from the old ones), care must be taken to - prevent device initialization and control that is incompatible with - currently active userspace drivers. For instance, if user - level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic - to perform output discovery & configuration at load time. - Likewise, if user-level drivers unaware of memory management are - in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to - be omitted. These requirements are driver-specific, and care - needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and - libraries working. The i915 driver supports the "modeset" - module parameter to control whether advanced features are - enabled at load time or in legacy fashion. + <para> + The <structname>drm_driver</structname> structure contains static + information that describes the driver and features it supports, and + pointers to methods that the DRM core will call to implement the DRM API. + We will first go through the <structname>drm_driver</structname> static + information fields, and will then describe individual operations in + details as they get used in later sections. </para> - <sect2> - <title>Driver private & performance counters</title> - <para> - The driver private hangs off the main drm_device structure and - can be used for tracking various device-specific bits of - information, like register offsets, command buffer status, - register state for suspend/resume, etc. At load time, a - driver may simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv - appropriately; it should be freed and drm_device.dev_priv set - to NULL when the driver is unloaded. - </para> + <title>Driver Information</title> + <sect3> + <title>Driver Features</title> + <para> + Drivers inform the DRM core about their requirements and supported + features by setting appropriate flags in the + <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field. Since those flags + influence the DRM core behaviour since registration time, most of them + must be set to registering the <structname>drm_driver</structname> + instance. + </para> + <synopsis>u32 driver_features;</synopsis> + <variablelist> + <title>Driver Feature Flags</title> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver uses AGP interface, the DRM core will manage AGP resources. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver needs AGP interface to function. AGP initialization failure + will become a fatal error. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_USE_MTRR</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver uses MTRR interface for mapping memory, the DRM core will + manage MTRR resources. Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver is capable of PCI DMA, mapping of PCI DMA buffers to + userspace will be enabled. Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_SG</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA, allocation and mapping of + scatter/gather buffers will be enabled. Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver supports DMA, the userspace DMA API will be supported. + Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term> + <listitem><para> + DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ handler. The + DRM core will automatically register an interrupt handler when the + flag is set. DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & + handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI + drivers). + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_IRQ_VBL</term> + <listitem><para>Unused. Deprecated.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE</term> + <listitem><para> + Should be set if the driver queues DMA requests and completes them + asynchronously. Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_FB_DMA</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver supports DMA to/from the framebuffer, mapping of frambuffer + DMA buffers to userspace will be supported. Deprecated. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_IRQ_VBL2</term> + <listitem><para>Unused. Deprecated.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_GEM</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver use the GEM memory manager. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_MODESET</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver supports mode setting interfaces (KMS). + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRIVER_PRIME</term> + <listitem><para> + Driver implements DRM PRIME buffer sharing. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Major, Minor and Patchlevel</title> + <synopsis>int major; +int minor; +int patchlevel;</synopsis> + <para> + The DRM core identifies driver versions by a major, minor and patch + level triplet. The information is printed to the kernel log at + initialization time and passed to userspace through the + DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl. + </para> + <para> + The major and minor numbers are also used to verify the requested driver + API version passed to DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION. When the driver API changes + between minor versions, applications can call DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION to + select a specific version of the API. If the requested major isn't equal + to the driver major, or the requested minor is larger than the driver + minor, the DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION call will return an error. Otherwise + the driver's set_version() method will be called with the requested + version. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Name, Description and Date</title> + <synopsis>char *name; +char *desc; +char *date;</synopsis> + <para> + The driver name is printed to the kernel log at initialization time, + used for IRQ registration and passed to userspace through + DRM_IOCTL_VERSION. + </para> + <para> + The driver description is a purely informative string passed to + userspace through the DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl and otherwise unused by + the kernel. + </para> + <para> + The driver date, formatted as YYYYMMDD, is meant to identify the date of + the latest modification to the driver. However, as most drivers fail to + update it, its value is mostly useless. The DRM core prints it to the + kernel log at initialization time and passes it to userspace through the + DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl. + </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Driver Load</title> <para> - The DRM supports several counters which may be used for rough - performance characterization. Note that the DRM stat counter - system is not often used by applications, and supporting - additional counters is completely optional. + The <methodname>load</methodname> method is the driver and device + initialization entry point. The method is responsible for allocating and + initializing driver private data, specifying supported performance + counters, performing resource allocation and mapping (e.g. acquiring + clocks, mapping registers or allocating command buffers), initializing + the memory manager (<xref linkend="drm-memory-management"/>), installing + the IRQ handler (<xref linkend="drm-irq-registration"/>), setting up + vertical blanking handling (<xref linkend="drm-vertical-blank"/>), mode + setting (<xref linkend="drm-mode-setting"/>) and initial output + configuration (<xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>). </para> + <note><para> + If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over from + User Mode Setting to Kernel Mode Setting), care must be taken to prevent + device initialization and control that is incompatible with currently + active userspace drivers. For instance, if user level mode setting + drivers are in use, it would be problematic to perform output discovery + & configuration at load time. Likewise, if user-level drivers + unaware of memory management are in use, memory management and command + buffer setup may need to be omitted. These requirements are + driver-specific, and care needs to be taken to keep both old and new + applications and libraries working. + </para></note> + <synopsis>int (*load) (struct drm_device *, unsigned long flags);</synopsis> <para> - These interfaces are deprecated and should not be used. If performance - monitoring is desired, the developer should investigate and - potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing infrastructure to export - GPU related performance information for consumption by performance - monitoring tools and applications. + The method takes two arguments, a pointer to the newly created + <structname>drm_device</structname> and flags. The flags are used to + pass the <structfield>driver_data</structfield> field of the device id + corresponding to the device passed to <function>drm_*_init()</function>. + Only PCI devices currently use this, USB and platform DRM drivers have + their <methodname>load</methodname> method called with flags to 0. </para> + <sect3> + <title>Driver Private & Performance Counters</title> + <para> + The driver private hangs off the main + <structname>drm_device</structname> structure and can be used for + tracking various device-specific bits of information, like register + offsets, command buffer status, register state for suspend/resume, etc. + At load time, a driver may simply allocate one and set + <structname>drm_device</structname>.<structfield>dev_priv</structfield> + appropriately; it should be freed and + <structname>drm_device</structname>.<structfield>dev_priv</structfield> + set to NULL when the driver is unloaded. + </para> + <para> + DRM supports several counters which were used for rough performance + characterization. This stat counter system is deprecated and should not + be used. If performance monitoring is desired, the developer should + investigate and potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing + infrastructure to export GPU related performance information for + consumption by performance monitoring tools and applications. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3 id="drm-irq-registration"> + <title>IRQ Registration</title> + <para> + The DRM core tries to facilitate IRQ handler registration and + unregistration by providing <function>drm_irq_install</function> and + <function>drm_irq_uninstall</function> functions. Those functions only + support a single interrupt per device. + </para> + <!--!Fdrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c drm_irq_install--> + <para> + Both functions get the device IRQ by calling + <function>drm_dev_to_irq</function>. This inline function will call a + bus-specific operation to retrieve the IRQ number. For platform devices, + <function>platform_get_irq</function>(..., 0) is used to retrieve the + IRQ number. + </para> + <para> + <function>drm_irq_install</function> starts by calling the + <methodname>irq_preinstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation + is optional and must make sure that the interrupt will not get fired by + clearing all pending interrupt flags or disabling the interrupt. + </para> + <para> + The IRQ will then be requested by a call to + <function>request_irq</function>. If the DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED driver + feature flag is set, a shared (IRQF_SHARED) IRQ handler will be + requested. + </para> + <para> + The IRQ handler function must be provided as the mandatory irq_handler + driver operation. It will get passed directly to + <function>request_irq</function> and thus has the same prototype as all + IRQ handlers. It will get called with a pointer to the DRM device as the + second argument. + </para> + <para> + Finally the function calls the optional + <methodname>irq_postinstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation + usually enables interrupts (excluding the vblank interrupt, which is + enabled separately), but drivers may choose to enable/disable interrupts + at a different time. + </para> + <para> + <function>drm_irq_uninstall</function> is similarly used to uninstall an + IRQ handler. It starts by waking up all processes waiting on a vblank + interrupt to make sure they don't hang, and then calls the optional + <methodname>irq_uninstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation + must disable all hardware interrupts. Finally the function frees the IRQ + by calling <function>free_irq</function>. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Memory Manager Initialization</title> + <para> + Every DRM driver requires a memory manager which must be initialized at + load time. DRM currently contains two memory managers, the Translation + Table Manager (TTM) and the Graphics Execution Manager (GEM). + This document describes the use of the GEM memory manager only. See + <xref linkend="drm-memory-management"/> for details. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Miscellaneous Device Configuration</title> + <para> + Another task that may be necessary for PCI devices during configuration + is mapping the video BIOS. On many devices, the VBIOS describes device + configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains flags indicating + device state. Mapping the BIOS can be done using the pci_map_rom() call, + a convenience function that takes care of mapping the actual ROM, + whether it has been shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) + or exists on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM has + been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, it should + be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is shared with + other BARs, so leaving it mapped could cause undesired behaviour like + hangs or memory corruption. + <!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom--> + </para> + </sect3> </sect2> + </sect1> - <sect2> - <title>Configuring the device</title> - <para> - Obviously, device configuration is device-specific. - However, there are several common operations: finding a - device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting - up an IRQ handler. - </para> - <para> - Finding & mapping resources is fairly straightforward. The - DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and - drm_get_resource_len(), may be used to find BARs on the given - drm_device struct. Once those values have been retrieved, the - driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new - mapping for the BAR in question. Note that you probably want a - drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any - mappings you create. -<!-- !Fdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_bufs.c drm_get_resource_* --> -<!-- !Finclude/drm/drmP.h drm_local_map_t --> - </para> - <para> - if compatibility with other operating systems isn't a concern - (DRM drivers can run under various BSD variants and OpenSolaris), - native Linux calls may be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_* - and iomap*/iounmap. See the Linux device driver book for more - info. - </para> - <para> - Once you have a register map, you may use the DRM_READn() and - DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or - use driver-specific versions to offset into your MMIO space - relative to a driver-specific base pointer (see I915_READ for - an example). - </para> - <para> - If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to - set up an interrupt handler when the driver is loaded. This - is done using the drm_irq_install() function. If your device - supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call - drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before - enabling interrupts on your device. This ensures the vblank related - structures are allocated and allows the core to handle vblank events. - </para> -<!--!Fdrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c drm_irq_install--> - <para> - Once your interrupt handler is registered (it uses your - drm_driver.irq_handler as the actual interrupt handling - function), you can safely enable interrupts on your device, - assuming any other state your interrupt handler uses is also - initialized. - </para> - <para> - Another task that may be necessary during configuration is - mapping the video BIOS. On many devices, the VBIOS describes - device configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains - flags indicating device state. Mapping the BIOS can be done - using the pci_map_rom() call, a convenience function that - takes care of mapping the actual ROM, whether it has been - shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists - on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM - has been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, - it should be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is - shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped could cause - undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption. -<!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom--> - </para> - </sect2> + <!-- Internals: memory management --> + <sect1 id="drm-memory-management"> + <title>Memory management</title> + <para> + Modern Linux systems require large amount of graphics memory to store + frame buffers, textures, vertices and other graphics-related data. Given + the very dynamic nature of many of that data, managing graphics memory + efficiently is thus crucial for the graphics stack and plays a central + role in the DRM infrastructure. + </para> + <para> + The DRM core includes two memory managers, namely Translation Table Maps + (TTM) and Graphics Execution Manager (GEM). TTM was the first DRM memory + manager to be developed and tried to be a one-size-fits-them all + solution. It provides a single userspace API to accomodate the need of + all hardware, supporting both Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) devices + and devices with dedicated video RAM (i.e. most discrete video cards). + This resulted in a large, complex piece of code that turned out to be + hard to use for driver development. + </para> + <para> + GEM started as an Intel-sponsored project in reaction to TTM's + complexity. Its design philosophy is completely different: instead of + providing a solution to every graphics memory-related problems, GEM + identified common code between drivers and created a support library to + share it. GEM has simpler initialization and execution requirements than + TTM, but has no video RAM management capabitilies and is thus limited to + UMA devices. + </para> <sect2> - <title>Memory manager initialization</title> - <para> - In order to allocate command buffers, cursor memory, scanout - buffers, etc., as well as support the latest features provided - by packages like Mesa and the X.Org X server, your driver - should support a memory manager. - </para> + <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title> <para> - If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you - need to set that up at load time as well. How you initialize - it depends on which memory manager you're using: TTM or GEM. + TTM design background and information belongs here. </para> <sect3> <title>TTM initialization</title> - <para> - TTM (for Translation Table Manager) manages video memory and - aperture space for graphics devices. TTM supports both UMA devices - and devices with dedicated video RAM (VRAM), i.e. most discrete - graphics devices. If your device has dedicated RAM, supporting - TTM is desirable. TTM also integrates tightly with your - driver-specific buffer execution function. See the radeon - driver for examples. - </para> - <para> - The core TTM structure is the ttm_bo_driver struct. It contains - several fields with function pointers for initializing the TTM, - allocating and freeing memory, waiting for command completion - and fence synchronization, and memory migration. See the - radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage. + <warning><para>This section is outdated.</para></warning> + <para> + Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver + structure. The structure contains several fields with function + pointers for initializing the TTM, allocating and freeing memory, + waiting for command completion and fence synchronization, and memory + migration. See the radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage. </para> <para> The ttm_global_reference structure is made up of several fields: @@ -445,82 +500,1081 @@ count for the TTM, which will call your initialization function. </para> </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2 id="drm-gem"> + <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title> + <para> + The GEM design approach has resulted in a memory manager that doesn't + provide full coverage of all (or even all common) use cases in its + userspace or kernel API. GEM exposes a set of standard memory-related + operations to userspace and a set of helper functions to drivers, and let + drivers implement hardware-specific operations with their own private API. + </para> + <para> + The GEM userspace API is described in the + <ulink url="http://lwn.net/Articles/283798/"><citetitle>GEM - the Graphics + Execution Manager</citetitle></ulink> article on LWN. While slightly + outdated, the document provides a good overview of the GEM API principles. + Buffer allocation and read and write operations, described as part of the + common GEM API, are currently implemented using driver-specific ioctls. + </para> + <para> + GEM is data-agnostic. It manages abstract buffer objects without knowing + what individual buffers contain. APIs that require knowledge of buffer + contents or purpose, such as buffer allocation or synchronization + primitives, are thus outside of the scope of GEM and must be implemented + using driver-specific ioctls. + </para> + <para> + On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: + <itemizedlist> + <listitem>Memory allocation and freeing</listitem> + <listitem>Command execution</listitem> + <listitem>Aperture management at command execution time</listitem> + </itemizedlist> + Buffer object allocation is relatively straightforward and largely + provided by Linux's shmem layer, which provides memory to back each + object. + </para> + <para> + Device-specific operations, such as command execution, pinning, buffer + read & write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers are left to + driver-specific ioctls. + </para> + <sect3> + <title>GEM Initialization</title> + <para> + Drivers that use GEM must set the DRIVER_GEM bit in the struct + <structname>drm_driver</structname> + <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field. The DRM core will + then automatically initialize the GEM core before calling the + <methodname>load</methodname> operation. Behind the scene, this will + create a DRM Memory Manager object which provides an address space + pool for object allocation. + </para> + <para> + In a KMS configuration, drivers need to allocate and initialize a + command ring buffer following core GEM initialization if required by + the hardware. UMA devices usually have what is called a "stolen" + memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and + large, contiguous memory regions required by the device. This space is + typically not managed by GEM, and must be initialized separately into + its own DRM MM object. + </para> + </sect3> <sect3> - <title>GEM initialization</title> - <para> - GEM is an alternative to TTM, designed specifically for UMA - devices. It has simpler initialization and execution requirements - than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability. Core GEM - is initialized by calling drm_mm_init() to create - a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for - object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver - needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following - core GEM initialization. A UMA device usually has what is called a - "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial - framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the - device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and it must - be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object. - </para> - <para> - Initialization is driver-specific. In the case of Intel - integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can - be done by calling the internal GEM init function, - i915_gem_do_init(). Since the 965GM is a UMA device - (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM manages - making regular RAM available for GPU operations. Memory set - aside by the BIOS (called "stolen" memory by the i915 - driver) is managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the - rest of the aperture is managed by GEM. - <programlisting> - /* Basic memrange allocator for stolen space (aka vram) */ - drm_memrange_init(&dev_priv->vram, 0, prealloc_size); - /* Let GEM Manage from end of prealloc space to end of aperture */ - i915_gem_do_init(dev, prealloc_size, agp_size); - </programlisting> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_memrange.c--> - </para> - <para> - Once the memory manager has been set up, we may allocate the - command buffer. In the i915 case, this is also done with a - GEM function, i915_gem_init_ringbuffer(). - </para> + <title>GEM Objects Creation</title> + <para> + GEM splits creation of GEM objects and allocation of the memory that + backs them in two distinct operations. + </para> + <para> + GEM objects are represented by an instance of struct + <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>. Drivers usually need to extend + GEM objects with private information and thus create a driver-specific + GEM object structure type that embeds an instance of struct + <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>. + </para> + <para> + To create a GEM object, a driver allocates memory for an instance of its + specific GEM object type and initializes the embedded struct + <structname>drm_gem_object</structname> with a call to + <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>. The function takes a pointer to + the DRM device, a pointer to the GEM object and the buffer object size + in bytes. + </para> + <para> + GEM uses shmem to allocate anonymous pageable memory. + <function>drm_gem_object_init</function> will create an shmfs file of + the requested size and store it into the struct + <structname>drm_gem_object</structname> <structfield>filp</structfield> + field. The memory is used as either main storage for the object when the + graphics hardware uses system memory directly or as a backing store + otherwise. + </para> + <para> + Drivers are responsible for the actual physical pages allocation by + calling <function>shmem_read_mapping_page_gfp</function> for each page. + Note that they can decide to allocate pages when initializing the GEM + object, or to delay allocation until the memory is needed (for instance + when a page fault occurs as a result of a userspace memory access or + when the driver needs to start a DMA transfer involving the memory). + </para> + <para> + Anonymous pageable memory allocation is not always desired, for instance + when the hardware requires physically contiguous system memory as is + often the case in embedded devices. Drivers can create GEM objects with + no shmfs backing (called private GEM objects) by initializing them with + a call to <function>drm_gem_private_object_init</function> instead of + <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>. Storage for private GEM + objects must be managed by drivers. + </para> + <para> + Drivers that do not need to extend GEM objects with private information + can call the <function>drm_gem_object_alloc</function> function to + allocate and initialize a struct <structname>drm_gem_object</structname> + instance. The GEM core will call the optional driver + <methodname>gem_init_object</methodname> operation after initializing + the GEM object with <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>. + <synopsis>int (*gem_init_object) (struct drm_gem_object *obj);</synopsis> + </para> + <para> + No alloc-and-init function exists for private GEM objects. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>GEM Objects Lifetime</title> + <para> + All GEM objects are reference-counted by the GEM core. References can be + acquired and release by <function>calling drm_gem_object_reference</function> + and <function>drm_gem_object_unreference</function> respectively. The + caller must hold the <structname>drm_device</structname> + <structfield>struct_mutex</structfield> lock. As a convenience, GEM + provides the <function>drm_gem_object_reference_unlocked</function> and + <function>drm_gem_object_unreference_unlocked</function> functions that + can be called without holding the lock. + </para> + <para> + When the last reference to a GEM object is released the GEM core calls + the <structname>drm_driver</structname> + <methodname>gem_free_object</methodname> operation. That operation is + mandatory for GEM-enabled drivers and must free the GEM object and all + associated resources. + </para> + <para> + <synopsis>void (*gem_free_object) (struct drm_gem_object *obj);</synopsis> + Drivers are responsible for freeing all GEM object resources, including + the resources created by the GEM core. If an mmap offset has been + created for the object (in which case + <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>::<structfield>map_list</structfield>::<structfield>map</structfield> + is not NULL) it must be freed by a call to + <function>drm_gem_free_mmap_offset</function>. The shmfs backing store + must be released by calling <function>drm_gem_object_release</function> + (that function can safely be called if no shmfs backing store has been + created). + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>GEM Objects Naming</title> + <para> + Communication between userspace and the kernel refers to GEM objects + using local handles, global names or, more recently, file descriptors. + All of those are 32-bit integer values; the usual Linux kernel limits + apply to the file descriptors. + </para> + <para> + GEM handles are local to a DRM file. Applications get a handle to a GEM + object through a driver-specific ioctl, and can use that handle to refer + to the GEM object in other standard or driver-specific ioctls. Closing a + DRM file handle frees all its GEM handles and dereferences the + associated GEM objects. + </para> + <para> + To create a handle for a GEM object drivers call + <function>drm_gem_handle_create</function>. The function takes a pointer + to the DRM file and the GEM object and returns a locally unique handle. + When the handle is no longer needed drivers delete it with a call to + <function>drm_gem_handle_delete</function>. Finally the GEM object + associated with a handle can be retrieved by a call to + <function>drm_gem_object_lookup</function>. + </para> + <para> + Handles don't take ownership of GEM objects, they only take a reference + to the object that will be dropped when the handle is destroyed. To + avoid leaking GEM objects, drivers must make sure they drop the + reference(s) they own (such as the initial reference taken at object + creation time) as appropriate, without any special consideration for the + handle. For example, in the particular case of combined GEM object and + handle creation in the implementation of the + <methodname>dumb_create</methodname> operation, drivers must drop the + initial reference to the GEM object before returning the handle. + </para> + <para> + GEM names are similar in purpose to handles but are not local to DRM + files. They can be passed between processes to reference a GEM object + globally. Names can't be used directly to refer to objects in the DRM + API, applications must convert handles to names and names to handles + using the DRM_IOCTL_GEM_FLINK and DRM_IOCTL_GEM_OPEN ioctls + respectively. The conversion is handled by the DRM core without any + driver-specific support. + </para> + <para> + Similar to global names, GEM file descriptors are also used to share GEM + objects across processes. They offer additional security: as file + descriptors must be explictly sent over UNIX domain sockets to be shared + between applications, they can't be guessed like the globally unique GEM + names. + </para> + <para> + Drivers that support GEM file descriptors, also known as the DRM PRIME + API, must set the DRIVER_PRIME bit in the struct + <structname>drm_driver</structname> + <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field, and implement the + <methodname>prime_handle_to_fd</methodname> and + <methodname>prime_fd_to_handle</methodname> operations. + </para> + <para> + <synopsis>int (*prime_handle_to_fd)(struct drm_device *dev, + struct drm_file *file_priv, uint32_t handle, + uint32_t flags, int *prime_fd); + int (*prime_fd_to_handle)(struct drm_device *dev, + struct drm_file *file_priv, int prime_fd, + uint32_t *handle);</synopsis> + Those two operations convert a handle to a PRIME file descriptor and + vice versa. Drivers must use the kernel dma-buf buffer sharing framework + to manage the PRIME file descriptors. + </para> + <para> + While non-GEM drivers must implement the operations themselves, GEM + drivers must use the <function>drm_gem_prime_handle_to_fd</function> + and <function>drm_gem_prime_fd_to_handle</function> helper functions. + Those helpers rely on the driver + <methodname>gem_prime_export</methodname> and + <methodname>gem_prime_import</methodname> operations to create a dma-buf + instance from a GEM object (dma-buf exporter role) and to create a GEM + object from a dma-buf instance (dma-buf importer role). + </para> + <para> + <synopsis>struct dma_buf * (*gem_prime_export)(struct drm_device *dev, + struct drm_gem_object *obj, + int flags); + struct drm_gem_object * (*gem_prime_import)(struct drm_device *dev, + struct dma_buf *dma_buf);</synopsis> + These two operations are mandatory for GEM drivers that support DRM + PRIME. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3 id="drm-gem-objects-mapping"> + <title>GEM Objects Mapping</title> + <para> + Because mapping operations are fairly heavyweight GEM favours + read/write-like access to buffers, implemented through driver-specific + ioctls, over mapping buffers to userspace. However, when random access + to the buffer is needed (to perform software rendering for instance), + direct access to the object can be more efficient. + </para> + <para> + The mmap system call can't be used directly to map GEM objects, as they + don't have their own file handle. Two alternative methods currently + co-exist to map GEM objects to userspace. The first method uses a + driver-specific ioctl to perform the mapping operation, calling + <function>do_mmap</function> under the hood. This is often considered + dubious, seems to be discouraged for new GEM-enabled drivers, and will + thus not be described here. + </para> + <para> + The second method uses the mmap system call on the DRM file handle. + <synopsis>void *mmap(void *addr, size_t length, int prot, int flags, int fd, + off_t offset);</synopsis> + DRM identifies the GEM object to be mapped by a fake offset passed + through the mmap offset argument. Prior to being mapped, a GEM object + must thus be associated with a fake offset. To do so, drivers must call + <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> on the object. The + function allocates a fake offset range from a pool and stores the + offset divided by PAGE_SIZE in + <literal>obj->map_list.hash.key</literal>. Care must be taken not to + call <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> if a fake offset + has already been allocated for the object. This can be tested by + <literal>obj->map_list.map</literal> being non-NULL. + </para> + <para> + Once allocated, the fake offset value + (<literal>obj->map_list.hash.key << PAGE_SHIFT</literal>) + must be passed to the application in a driver-specific way and can then + be used as the mmap offset argument. + </para> + <para> + The GEM core provides a helper method <function>drm_gem_mmap</function> + to handle object mapping. The method can be set directly as the mmap + file operation handler. It will look up the GEM object based on the + offset value and set the VMA operations to the + <structname>drm_driver</structname> <structfield>gem_vm_ops</structfield> + field. Note that <function>drm_gem_mmap</function> doesn't map memory to + userspace, but relies on the driver-provided fault handler to map pages + individually. + </para> + <para> + To use <function>drm_gem_mmap</function>, drivers must fill the struct + <structname>drm_driver</structname> <structfield>gem_vm_ops</structfield> + field with a pointer to VM operations. + </para> + <para> + <synopsis>struct vm_operations_struct *gem_vm_ops + + struct vm_operations_struct { + void (*open)(struct vm_area_struct * area); + void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct * area); + int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct vm_fault *vmf); + };</synopsis> + </para> + <para> + The <methodname>open</methodname> and <methodname>close</methodname> + operations must update the GEM object reference count. Drivers can use + the <function>drm_gem_vm_open</function> and + <function>drm_gem_vm_close</function> helper functions directly as open + and close handlers. + </para> + <para> + The fault operation handler is responsible for mapping individual pages + to userspace when a page fault occurs. Depending on the memory + allocation scheme, drivers can allocate pages at fault time, or can + decide to allocate memory for the GEM object at the time the object is + created. + </para> + <para> + Drivers that want to map the GEM object upfront instead of handling page + faults can implement their own mmap file operation handler. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Dumb GEM Objects</title> + <para> + The GEM API doesn't standardize GEM objects creation and leaves it to + driver-specific ioctls. While not an issue for full-fledged graphics + stacks that include device-specific userspace components (in libdrm for + instance), this limit makes DRM-based early boot graphics unnecessarily + complex. + </para> + <para> + Dumb GEM objects partly alleviate the problem by providing a standard + API to create dumb buffers suitable for scanout, which can then be used + to create KMS frame buffers. + </para> + <para> + To support dumb GEM objects drivers must implement the + <methodname>dumb_create</methodname>, + <methodname>dumb_destroy</methodname> and + <methodname>dumb_map_offset</methodname> operations. + </para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*dumb_create)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev, + struct drm_mode_create_dumb *args);</synopsis> + <para> + The <methodname>dumb_create</methodname> operation creates a GEM + object suitable for scanout based on the width, height and depth + from the struct <structname>drm_mode_create_dumb</structname> + argument. It fills the argument's <structfield>handle</structfield>, + <structfield>pitch</structfield> and <structfield>size</structfield> + fields with a handle for the newly created GEM object and its line + pitch and size in bytes. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*dumb_destroy)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev, + uint32_t handle);</synopsis> + <para> + The <methodname>dumb_destroy</methodname> operation destroys a dumb + GEM object created by <methodname>dumb_create</methodname>. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*dumb_map_offset)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev, + uint32_t handle, uint64_t *offset);</synopsis> + <para> + The <methodname>dumb_map_offset</methodname> operation associates an + mmap fake offset with the GEM object given by the handle and returns + it. Drivers must use the + <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> function to + associate the fake offset as described in + <xref linkend="drm-gem-objects-mapping"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Memory Coherency</title> + <para> + When mapped to the device or used in a command buffer, backing pages + for an object are flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to + be coherent with the GPU. Likewise, if the CPU accesses an object + after the GPU has finished rendering to the object, then the object + must be made coherent with the CPU's view of memory, usually involving + GPU cache flushing of various kinds. This core CPU<->GPU + coherency management is provided by a device-specific ioctl, which + evaluates an object's current domain and performs any necessary + flushing or synchronization to put the object into the desired + coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, i.e. an active + render target; in that case, setting the domain blocks the client and + waits for rendering to complete before performing any necessary + flushing operations). + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Command Execution</title> + <para> + Perhaps the most important GEM function for GPU devices is providing a + command execution interface to clients. Client programs construct + command buffers containing references to previously allocated memory + objects, and then submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to + bind all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide + necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers. + This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding + others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation + support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients. Clients must take + care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects than + can fit in the GTT; otherwise, GEM will reject them and no rendering + will occur. Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require fence + registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits on + pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence registers + than are available to the client. Such resource management should be + abstracted from the client in libdrm. + </para> </sect3> </sect2> + </sect1> + + <!-- Internals: mode setting --> + <sect1 id="drm-mode-setting"> + <title>Mode Setting</title> + <para> + Drivers must initialize the mode setting core by calling + <function>drm_mode_config_init</function> on the DRM device. The function + initializes the <structname>drm_device</structname> + <structfield>mode_config</structfield> field and never fails. Once done, + mode configuration must be setup by initializing the following fields. + </para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int min_width, min_height; +int max_width, max_height;</synopsis> + <para> + Minimum and maximum width and height of the frame buffers in pixel + units. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>struct drm_mode_config_funcs *funcs;</synopsis> + <para>Mode setting functions.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> <sect2> - <title>Output configuration</title> + <title>Frame Buffer Creation</title> + <synopsis>struct drm_framebuffer *(*fb_create)(struct drm_device *dev, + struct drm_file *file_priv, + struct drm_mode_fb_cmd2 *mode_cmd);</synopsis> <para> - The final initialization task is output configuration. This involves: - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - Finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders, and connectors - for the device. - </listitem> - <listitem> - Creating an initial configuration. - </listitem> - <listitem> - Registering a framebuffer console driver. - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + Frame buffers are abstract memory objects that provide a source of + pixels to scanout to a CRTC. Applications explicitly request the + creation of frame buffers through the DRM_IOCTL_MODE_ADDFB(2) ioctls and + receive an opaque handle that can be passed to the KMS CRTC control, + plane configuration and page flip functions. + </para> + <para> + Frame buffers rely on the underneath memory manager for low-level memory + operations. When creating a frame buffer applications pass a memory + handle (or a list of memory handles for multi-planar formats) through + the <parameter>drm_mode_fb_cmd2</parameter> argument. This document + assumes that the driver uses GEM, those handles thus reference GEM + objects. + </para> + <para> + Drivers must first validate the requested frame buffer parameters passed + through the mode_cmd argument. In particular this is where invalid + sizes, pixel formats or pitches can be caught. + </para> + <para> + If the parameters are deemed valid, drivers then create, initialize and + return an instance of struct <structname>drm_framebuffer</structname>. + If desired the instance can be embedded in a larger driver-specific + structure. The new instance is initialized with a call to + <function>drm_framebuffer_init</function> which takes a pointer to DRM + frame buffer operations (struct + <structname>drm_framebuffer_funcs</structname>). Frame buffer operations are + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*create_handle)(struct drm_framebuffer *fb, + struct drm_file *file_priv, unsigned int *handle);</synopsis> + <para> + Create a handle to the frame buffer underlying memory object. If + the frame buffer uses a multi-plane format, the handle will + reference the memory object associated with the first plane. + </para> + <para> + Drivers call <function>drm_gem_handle_create</function> to create + the handle. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_framebuffer *framebuffer);</synopsis> + <para> + Destroy the frame buffer object and frees all associated + resources. Drivers must call + <function>drm_framebuffer_cleanup</function> to free resources + allocated by the DRM core for the frame buffer object, and must + make sure to unreference all memory objects associated with the + frame buffer. Handles created by the + <methodname>create_handle</methodname> operation are released by + the DRM core. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*dirty)(struct drm_framebuffer *framebuffer, + struct drm_file *file_priv, unsigned flags, unsigned color, + struct drm_clip_rect *clips, unsigned num_clips);</synopsis> + <para> + This optional operation notifies the driver that a region of the + frame buffer has changed in response to a DRM_IOCTL_MODE_DIRTYFB + ioctl call. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + <para> + After initializing the <structname>drm_framebuffer</structname> + instance drivers must fill its <structfield>width</structfield>, + <structfield>height</structfield>, <structfield>pitches</structfield>, + <structfield>offsets</structfield>, <structfield>depth</structfield>, + <structfield>bits_per_pixel</structfield> and + <structfield>pixel_format</structfield> fields from the values passed + through the <parameter>drm_mode_fb_cmd2</parameter> argument. They + should call the <function>drm_helper_mode_fill_fb_struct</function> + helper function to do so. + </para> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Output Polling</title> + <synopsis>void (*output_poll_changed)(struct drm_device *dev);</synopsis> + <para> + This operation notifies the driver that the status of one or more + connectors has changed. Drivers that use the fb helper can just call the + <function>drm_fb_helper_hotplug_event</function> function to handle this + operation. + </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <!-- Internals: kms initialization and cleanup --> + + <sect1 id="drm-kms-init"> + <title>KMS Initialization and Cleanup</title> + <para> + A KMS device is abstracted and exposed as a set of planes, CRTCs, encoders + and connectors. KMS drivers must thus create and initialize all those + objects at load time after initializing mode setting. + </para> + <sect2> + <title>CRTCs (struct <structname>drm_crtc</structname>)</title> + <para> + A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that contains a + pointer to a scanout buffer. Therefore, the number of CRTCs available + determines how many independent scanout buffers can be active at any + given time. The CRTC structure contains several fields to support this: + a pointer to some video memory (abstracted as a frame buffer object), a + display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video memory to support + panning or configurations where one piece of video memory spans multiple + CRTCs. </para> <sect3> - <title>Output discovery and initialization</title> - <para> - Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders, and - connectors, namely: drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init(), and - drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to - perform common tasks. - </para> - <para> - Connectors should be registered with sysfs once they've been - detected and initialized, using the - drm_sysfs_connector_add() function. Likewise, when they're - removed from the system, they should be destroyed with - drm_sysfs_connector_remove(). - </para> - <programlisting> -<![CDATA[ + <title>CRTC Initialization</title> + <para> + A KMS device must create and register at least one struct + <structname>drm_crtc</structname> instance. The instance is allocated + and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a larger structure, and + registered with a call to <function>drm_crtc_init</function> with a + pointer to CRTC functions. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>CRTC Operations</title> + <sect4> + <title>Set Configuration</title> + <synopsis>int (*set_config)(struct drm_mode_set *set);</synopsis> + <para> + Apply a new CRTC configuration to the device. The configuration + specifies a CRTC, a frame buffer to scan out from, a (x,y) position in + the frame buffer, a display mode and an array of connectors to drive + with the CRTC if possible. + </para> + <para> + If the frame buffer specified in the configuration is NULL, the driver + must detach all encoders connected to the CRTC and all connectors + attached to those encoders and disable them. + </para> + <para> + This operation is called with the mode config lock held. + </para> + <note><para> + FIXME: How should set_config interact with DPMS? If the CRTC is + suspended, should it be resumed? + </para></note> + </sect4> + <sect4> + <title>Page Flipping</title> + <synopsis>int (*page_flip)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, struct drm_framebuffer *fb, + struct drm_pending_vblank_event *event);</synopsis> + <para> + Schedule a page flip to the given frame buffer for the CRTC. This + operation is called with the mode config mutex held. + </para> + <para> + Page flipping is a synchronization mechanism that replaces the frame + buffer being scanned out by the CRTC with a new frame buffer during + vertical blanking, avoiding tearing. When an application requests a page + flip the DRM core verifies that the new frame buffer is large enough to + be scanned out by the CRTC in the currently configured mode and then + calls the CRTC <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation with a + pointer to the new frame buffer. + </para> + <para> + The <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation schedules a page flip. + Once any pending rendering targetting the new frame buffer has + completed, the CRTC will be reprogrammed to display that frame buffer + after the next vertical refresh. The operation must return immediately + without waiting for rendering or page flip to complete and must block + any new rendering to the frame buffer until the page flip completes. + </para> + <para> + If a page flip is already pending, the + <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation must return + -<errorname>EBUSY</errorname>. + </para> + <para> + To synchronize page flip to vertical blanking the driver will likely + need to enable vertical blanking interrupts. It should call + <function>drm_vblank_get</function> for that purpose, and call + <function>drm_vblank_put</function> after the page flip completes. + </para> + <para> + If the application has requested to be notified when page flip completes + the <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation will be called with a + non-NULL <parameter>event</parameter> argument pointing to a + <structname>drm_pending_vblank_event</structname> instance. Upon page + flip completion the driver must fill the + <parameter>event</parameter>::<structfield>event</structfield> + <structfield>sequence</structfield>, <structfield>tv_sec</structfield> + and <structfield>tv_usec</structfield> fields with the associated + vertical blanking count and timestamp, add the event to the + <parameter>drm_file</parameter> list of events to be signaled, and wake + up any waiting process. This can be performed with + <programlisting><![CDATA[ + struct timeval now; + + event->event.sequence = drm_vblank_count_and_time(..., &now); + event->event.tv_sec = now.tv_sec; + event->event.tv_usec = now.tv_usec; + + spin_lock_irqsave(&dev->event_lock, flags); + list_add_tail(&event->base.link, &event->base.file_priv->event_list); + wake_up_interruptible(&event->base.file_priv->event_wait); + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev->event_lock, flags); + ]]></programlisting> + </para> + <note><para> + FIXME: Could drivers that don't need to wait for rendering to complete + just add the event to <literal>dev->vblank_event_list</literal> and + let the DRM core handle everything, as for "normal" vertical blanking + events? + </para></note> + <para> + While waiting for the page flip to complete, the + <literal>event->base.link</literal> list head can be used freely by + the driver to store the pending event in a driver-specific list. + </para> + <para> + If the file handle is closed before the event is signaled, drivers must + take care to destroy the event in their + <methodname>preclose</methodname> operation (and, if needed, call + <function>drm_vblank_put</function>). + </para> + </sect4> + <sect4> + <title>Miscellaneous</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*gamma_set)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, u16 *r, u16 *g, u16 *b, + uint32_t start, uint32_t size);</synopsis> + <para> + Apply a gamma table to the device. The operation is optional. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis> + <para> + Destroy the CRTC when not needed anymore. See + <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect4> + </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Planes (struct <structname>drm_plane</structname>)</title> + <para> + A plane represents an image source that can be blended with or overlayed + on top of a CRTC during the scanout process. Planes are associated with + a frame buffer to crop a portion of the image memory (source) and + optionally scale it to a destination size. The result is then blended + with or overlayed on top of a CRTC. + </para> + <sect3> + <title>Plane Initialization</title> + <para> + Planes are optional. To create a plane, a KMS drivers allocates and + zeroes an instances of struct <structname>drm_plane</structname> + (possibly as part of a larger structure) and registers it with a call + to <function>drm_plane_init</function>. The function takes a bitmask + of the CRTCs that can be associated with the plane, a pointer to the + plane functions and a list of format supported formats. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Plane Operations</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*update_plane)(struct drm_plane *plane, struct drm_crtc *crtc, + struct drm_framebuffer *fb, int crtc_x, int crtc_y, + unsigned int crtc_w, unsigned int crtc_h, + uint32_t src_x, uint32_t src_y, + uint32_t src_w, uint32_t src_h);</synopsis> + <para> + Enable and configure the plane to use the given CRTC and frame buffer. + </para> + <para> + The source rectangle in frame buffer memory coordinates is given by + the <parameter>src_x</parameter>, <parameter>src_y</parameter>, + <parameter>src_w</parameter> and <parameter>src_h</parameter> + parameters (as 16.16 fixed point values). Devices that don't support + subpixel plane coordinates can ignore the fractional part. + </para> + <para> + The destination rectangle in CRTC coordinates is given by the + <parameter>crtc_x</parameter>, <parameter>crtc_y</parameter>, + <parameter>crtc_w</parameter> and <parameter>crtc_h</parameter> + parameters (as integer values). Devices scale the source rectangle to + the destination rectangle. If scaling is not supported, and the source + rectangle size doesn't match the destination rectangle size, the + driver must return a -<errorname>EINVAL</errorname> error. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*disable_plane)(struct drm_plane *plane);</synopsis> + <para> + Disable the plane. The DRM core calls this method in response to a + DRM_IOCTL_MODE_SETPLANE ioctl call with the frame buffer ID set to 0. + Disabled planes must not be processed by the CRTC. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_plane *plane);</synopsis> + <para> + Destroy the plane when not needed anymore. See + <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Encoders (struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname>)</title> + <para> + An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a format + suitable for any attached connectors. On some devices, it may be + possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one encoder. In that + case, both encoders would receive data from the same scanout buffer, + resulting in a "cloned" display configuration across the connectors + attached to each encoder. + </para> + <sect3> + <title>Encoder Initialization</title> + <para> + As for CRTCs, a KMS driver must create, initialize and register at + least one struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname> instance. The + instance is allocated and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a + larger structure. + </para> + <para> + Drivers must initialize the struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname> + <structfield>possible_crtcs</structfield> and + <structfield>possible_clones</structfield> fields before registering the + encoder. Both fields are bitmasks of respectively the CRTCs that the + encoder can be connected to, and sibling encoders candidate for cloning. + </para> + <para> + After being initialized, the encoder must be registered with a call to + <function>drm_encoder_init</function>. The function takes a pointer to + the encoder functions and an encoder type. Supported types are + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC for VGA and analog on DVI-I/DVI-A + </listitem> + <listitem> + DRM_MODE_ENCODER_TMDS for DVI, HDMI and (embedded) DisplayPort + </listitem> + <listitem> + DRM_MODE_ENCODER_LVDS for display panels + </listitem> + <listitem> + DRM_MODE_ENCODER_TVDAC for TV output (Composite, S-Video, Component, + SCART) + </listitem> + <listitem> + DRM_MODE_ENCODER_VIRTUAL for virtual machine displays + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + <para> + Encoders must be attached to a CRTC to be used. DRM drivers leave + encoders unattached at initialization time. Applications (or the fbdev + compatibility layer when implemented) are responsible for attaching the + encoders they want to use to a CRTC. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Encoder Operations</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis> + <para> + Called to destroy the encoder when not needed anymore. See + <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Connectors (struct <structname>drm_connector</structname>)</title> + <para> + A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device, and + usually connects directly to an external display device like a monitor + or laptop panel. A connector can only be attached to one encoder at a + time. The connector is also the structure where information about the + attached display is kept, so it contains fields for display data, EDID + data, DPMS & connection status, and information about modes + supported on the attached displays. + </para> + <sect3> + <title>Connector Initialization</title> + <para> + Finally a KMS driver must create, initialize, register and attach at + least one struct <structname>drm_connector</structname> instance. The + instance is created as other KMS objects and initialized by setting the + following fields. + </para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term><structfield>interlace_allowed</structfield></term> + <listitem><para> + Whether the connector can handle interlaced modes. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><structfield>doublescan_allowed</structfield></term> + <listitem><para> + Whether the connector can handle doublescan. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><structfield>display_info + </structfield></term> + <listitem><para> + Display information is filled from EDID information when a display + is detected. For non hot-pluggable displays such as flat panels in + embedded systems, the driver should initialize the + <structfield>display_info</structfield>.<structfield>width_mm</structfield> + and + <structfield>display_info</structfield>.<structfield>height_mm</structfield> + fields with the physical size of the display. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term id="drm-kms-connector-polled"><structfield>polled</structfield></term> + <listitem><para> + Connector polling mode, a combination of + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_HPD</term> + <listitem><para> + The connector generates hotplug events and doesn't need to be + periodically polled. The CONNECT and DISCONNECT flags must not + be set together with the HPD flag. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_CONNECT</term> + <listitem><para> + Periodically poll the connector for connection. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_DISCONNECT</term> + <listitem><para> + Periodically poll the connector for disconnection. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + Set to 0 for connectors that don't support connection status + discovery. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para> + The connector is then registered with a call to + <function>drm_connector_init</function> with a pointer to the connector + functions and a connector type, and exposed through sysfs with a call to + <function>drm_sysfs_connector_add</function>. + </para> + <para> + Supported connector types are + <itemizedlist> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVII</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVID</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVIA</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_Composite</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_SVIDEO</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_LVDS</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_Component</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_9PinDIN</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DisplayPort</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_HDMIA</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_HDMIB</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_TV</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_eDP</listitem> + <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VIRTUAL</listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + <para> + Connectors must be attached to an encoder to be used. For devices that + map connectors to encoders 1:1, the connector should be attached at + initialization time with a call to + <function>drm_mode_connector_attach_encoder</function>. The driver must + also set the <structname>drm_connector</structname> + <structfield>encoder</structfield> field to point to the attached + encoder. + </para> + <para> + Finally, drivers must initialize the connectors state change detection + with a call to <function>drm_kms_helper_poll_init</function>. If at + least one connector is pollable but can't generate hotplug interrupts + (indicated by the DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_CONNECT and + DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_DISCONNECT connector flags), a delayed work will + automatically be queued to periodically poll for changes. Connectors + that can generate hotplug interrupts must be marked with the + DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_HPD flag instead, and their interrupt handler must + call <function>drm_helper_hpd_irq_event</function>. The function will + queue a delayed work to check the state of all connectors, but no + periodic polling will be done. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3> + <title>Connector Operations</title> + <note><para> + Unless otherwise state, all operations are mandatory. + </para></note> + <sect4> + <title>DPMS</title> + <synopsis>void (*dpms)(struct drm_connector *connector, int mode);</synopsis> + <para> + The DPMS operation sets the power state of a connector. The mode + argument is one of + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_ON</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_STANDBY</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_SUSPEND</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_OFF</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + <para> + In all but DPMS_ON mode the encoder to which the connector is attached + should put the display in low-power mode by driving its signals + appropriately. If more than one connector is attached to the encoder + care should be taken not to change the power state of other displays as + a side effect. Low-power mode should be propagated to the encoders and + CRTCs when all related connectors are put in low-power mode. + </para> + </sect4> + <sect4> + <title>Modes</title> + <synopsis>int (*fill_modes)(struct drm_connector *connector, uint32_t max_width, + uint32_t max_height);</synopsis> + <para> + Fill the mode list with all supported modes for the connector. If the + <parameter>max_width</parameter> and <parameter>max_height</parameter> + arguments are non-zero, the implementation must ignore all modes wider + than <parameter>max_width</parameter> or higher than + <parameter>max_height</parameter>. + </para> + <para> + The connector must also fill in this operation its + <structfield>display_info</structfield> + <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and + <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields with the connected display + physical size in millimeters. The fields should be set to 0 if the value + isn't known or is not applicable (for instance for projector devices). + </para> + </sect4> + <sect4> + <title>Connection Status</title> + <para> + The connection status is updated through polling or hotplug events when + supported (see <xref linkend="drm-kms-connector-polled"/>). The status + value is reported to userspace through ioctls and must not be used + inside the driver, as it only gets initialized by a call to + <function>drm_mode_getconnector</function> from userspace. + </para> + <synopsis>enum drm_connector_status (*detect)(struct drm_connector *connector, + bool force);</synopsis> + <para> + Check to see if anything is attached to the connector. The + <parameter>force</parameter> parameter is set to false whilst polling or + to true when checking the connector due to user request. + <parameter>force</parameter> can be used by the driver to avoid + expensive, destructive operations during automated probing. + </para> + <para> + Return connector_status_connected if something is connected to the + connector, connector_status_disconnected if nothing is connected and + connector_status_unknown if the connection state isn't known. + </para> + <para> + Drivers should only return connector_status_connected if the connection + status has really been probed as connected. Connectors that can't detect + the connection status, or failed connection status probes, should return + connector_status_unknown. + </para> + </sect4> + <sect4> + <title>Miscellaneous</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis> + <para> + Destroy the connector when not needed anymore. See + <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect4> + </sect3> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Cleanup</title> + <para> + The DRM core manages its objects' lifetime. When an object is not needed + anymore the core calls its destroy function, which must clean up and + free every resource allocated for the object. Every + <function>drm_*_init</function> call must be matched with a + corresponding <function>drm_*_cleanup</function> call to cleanup CRTCs + (<function>drm_crtc_cleanup</function>), planes + (<function>drm_plane_cleanup</function>), encoders + (<function>drm_encoder_cleanup</function>) and connectors + (<function>drm_connector_cleanup</function>). Furthermore, connectors + that have been added to sysfs must be removed by a call to + <function>drm_sysfs_connector_remove</function> before calling + <function>drm_connector_cleanup</function>. + </para> + <para> + Connectors state change detection must be cleanup up with a call to + <function>drm_kms_helper_poll_fini</function>. + </para> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Output discovery and initialization example</title> + <programlisting><![CDATA[ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) { struct drm_connector *connector; @@ -556,252 +1610,741 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs); drm_sysfs_connector_add(connector); -} -]]> - </programlisting> - <para> - In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a - CRT connector and encoder combination is created. A device-specific - i2c bus is also created for fetching EDID data and - performing monitor detection. Once the process is complete, - the new connector is registered with sysfs to make its - properties available to applications. - </para> - <sect4> - <title>Helper functions and core functions</title> - <para> - Since many PC-class graphics devices have similar display output - designs, the DRM provides a set of helper functions to make - output management easier. The core helper routines handle - encoder re-routing and the disabling of unused functions following - mode setting. Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for - devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes - for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to - connectors). Devices with more complex requirements needing - finer grained management may opt to use the core callbacks - directly. - </para> - <para> - [Insert typical diagram here.] [Insert OMAP style config here.] - </para> - </sect4> - <para> - Each encoder object needs to provide: - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - A DPMS (basically on/off) function. - </listitem> - <listitem> - A mode-fixup function (for converting requested modes into - native hardware timings). - </listitem> - <listitem> - Functions (prepare, set, and commit) for use by the core DRM - helper functions. - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - Connector helpers need to provide functions (mode-fetch, validity, - and encoder-matching) for returning an ideal encoder for a given - connector. The core connector functions include a DPMS callback, - save/restore routines (deprecated), detection, mode probing, - property handling, and cleanup functions. - </para> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.h--> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c--> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c--> - </sect3> +}]]></programlisting> + <para> + In the example above (taken from the i915 driver), a CRTC, connector and + encoder combination is created. A device-specific i2c bus is also + created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once + the process is complete, the new connector is registered with sysfs to + make its properties available to applications. + </para> </sect2> </sect1> - <!-- Internals: vblank handling --> + <!-- Internals: mid-layer helper functions --> <sect1> - <title>VBlank event handling</title> + <title>Mid-layer Helper Functions</title> <para> - The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls: - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure as its argument, - and it is used to block or request a signal when a specified - vblank event occurs. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This should be called by application level drivers before and - after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank - counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots - the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the - _DRM_PRE_MODESET command, so that the counter won't go backwards - (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c--> + The CRTC, encoder and connector functions provided by the drivers + implement the DRM API. They're called by the DRM core and ioctl handlers + to handle device state changes and configuration request. As implementing + those functions often requires logic not specific to drivers, mid-layer + helper functions are available to avoid duplicating boilerplate code. + </para> + <para> + The DRM core contains one mid-layer implementation. The mid-layer provides + implementations of several CRTC, encoder and connector functions (called + from the top of the mid-layer) that pre-process requests and call + lower-level functions provided by the driver (at the bottom of the + mid-layer). For instance, the + <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function can be used to + fill the struct <structname>drm_crtc_funcs</structname> + <structfield>set_config</structfield> field. When called, it will split + the <methodname>set_config</methodname> operation in smaller, simpler + operations and call the driver to handle them. </para> <para> - To support the functions above, the DRM core provides several - helper functions for tracking vertical blank counters, and - requires drivers to provide several callbacks: - get_vblank_counter(), enable_vblank() and disable_vblank(). The - core uses get_vblank_counter() to keep the counter accurate - across interrupt disable periods. It should return the current - vertical blank event count, which is often tracked in a device - register. The enable and disable vblank callbacks should enable - and disable vertical blank interrupts, respectively. In the - absence of DRM clients waiting on vblank events, the core DRM - code uses the disable_vblank() function to disable - interrupts, which saves power. They are re-enabled again when - a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above. + To use the mid-layer, drivers call <function>drm_crtc_helper_add</function>, + <function>drm_encoder_helper_add</function> and + <function>drm_connector_helper_add</function> functions to install their + mid-layer bottom operations handlers, and fill the + <structname>drm_crtc_funcs</structname>, + <structname>drm_encoder_funcs</structname> and + <structname>drm_connector_funcs</structname> structures with pointers to + the mid-layer top API functions. Installing the mid-layer bottom operation + handlers is best done right after registering the corresponding KMS object. </para> <para> - A device that doesn't provide a count register may simply use an - internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank - interrupt (and then treat the enable_vblank() and disable_vblank() - callbacks as no-ops). + The mid-layer is not split between CRTC, encoder and connector operations. + To use it, a driver must provide bottom functions for all of the three KMS + entities. </para> + <sect2> + <title>Helper Functions</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int drm_crtc_helper_set_config(struct drm_mode_set *set);</synopsis> + <para> + The <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> helper function + is a CRTC <methodname>set_config</methodname> implementation. It + first tries to locate the best encoder for each connector by calling + the connector <methodname>best_encoder</methodname> helper + operation. + </para> + <para> + After locating the appropriate encoders, the helper function will + call the <methodname>mode_fixup</methodname> encoder and CRTC helper + operations to adjust the requested mode, or reject it completely in + which case an error will be returned to the application. If the new + configuration after mode adjustment is identical to the current + configuration the helper function will return without performing any + other operation. + </para> + <para> + If the adjusted mode is identical to the current mode but changes to + the frame buffer need to be applied, the + <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function will call + the CRTC <methodname>mode_set_base</methodname> helper operation. If + the adjusted mode differs from the current mode, or if the + <methodname>mode_set_base</methodname> helper operation is not + provided, the helper function performs a full mode set sequence by + calling the <methodname>prepare</methodname>, + <methodname>mode_set</methodname> and + <methodname>commit</methodname> CRTC and encoder helper operations, + in that order. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void drm_helper_connector_dpms(struct drm_connector *connector, int mode);</synopsis> + <para> + The <function>drm_helper_connector_dpms</function> helper function + is a connector <methodname>dpms</methodname> implementation that + tracks power state of connectors. To use the function, drivers must + provide <methodname>dpms</methodname> helper operations for CRTCs + and encoders to apply the DPMS state to the device. + </para> + <para> + The mid-layer doesn't track the power state of CRTCs and encoders. + The <methodname>dpms</methodname> helper operations can thus be + called with a mode identical to the currently active mode. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes(struct drm_connector *connector, + uint32_t maxX, uint32_t maxY);</synopsis> + <para> + The <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function> helper + function is a connector <methodname>fill_modes</methodname> + implementation that updates the connection status for the connector + and then retrieves a list of modes by calling the connector + <methodname>get_modes</methodname> helper operation. + </para> + <para> + The function filters out modes larger than + <parameter>max_width</parameter> and <parameter>max_height</parameter> + if specified. It then calls the connector + <methodname>mode_valid</methodname> helper operation for each mode in + the probed list to check whether the mode is valid for the connector. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>CRTC Helper Operations</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem id="drm-helper-crtc-mode-fixup"> + <synopsis>bool (*mode_fixup)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, + const struct drm_display_mode *mode, + struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis> + <para> + Let CRTCs adjust the requested mode or reject it completely. This + operation returns true if the mode is accepted (possibly after being + adjusted) or false if it is rejected. + </para> + <para> + The <methodname>mode_fixup</methodname> operation should reject the + mode if it can't reasonably use it. The definition of "reasonable" + is currently fuzzy in this context. One possible behaviour would be + to set the adjusted mode to the panel timings when a fixed-mode + panel is used with hardware capable of scaling. Another behaviour + would be to accept any input mode and adjust it to the closest mode + supported by the hardware (FIXME: This needs to be clarified). + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*mode_set_base)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, int x, int y, + struct drm_framebuffer *old_fb)</synopsis> + <para> + Move the CRTC on the current frame buffer (stored in + <literal>crtc->fb</literal>) to position (x,y). Any of the frame + buffer, x position or y position may have been modified. + </para> + <para> + This helper operation is optional. If not provided, the + <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function will fall + back to the <methodname>mode_set</methodname> helper operation. + </para> + <note><para> + FIXME: Why are x and y passed as arguments, as they can be accessed + through <literal>crtc->x</literal> and + <literal>crtc->y</literal>? + </para></note> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*prepare)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis> + <para> + Prepare the CRTC for mode setting. This operation is called after + validating the requested mode. Drivers use it to perform + device-specific operations required before setting the new mode. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*mode_set)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, struct drm_display_mode *mode, + struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode, int x, int y, + struct drm_framebuffer *old_fb);</synopsis> + <para> + Set a new mode, position and frame buffer. Depending on the device + requirements, the mode can be stored internally by the driver and + applied in the <methodname>commit</methodname> operation, or + programmed to the hardware immediately. + </para> + <para> + The <methodname>mode_set</methodname> operation returns 0 on success + or a negative error code if an error occurs. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*commit)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis> + <para> + Commit a mode. This operation is called after setting the new mode. + Upon return the device must use the new mode and be fully + operational. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Encoder Helper Operations</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>bool (*mode_fixup)(struct drm_encoder *encoder, + const struct drm_display_mode *mode, + struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis> + <note><para> + FIXME: The mode argument be const, but the i915 driver modifies + mode->clock in <function>intel_dp_mode_fixup</function>. + </para></note> + <para> + Let encoders adjust the requested mode or reject it completely. This + operation returns true if the mode is accepted (possibly after being + adjusted) or false if it is rejected. See the + <link linkend="drm-helper-crtc-mode-fixup">mode_fixup CRTC helper + operation</link> for an explanation of the allowed adjustments. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*prepare)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis> + <para> + Prepare the encoder for mode setting. This operation is called after + validating the requested mode. Drivers use it to perform + device-specific operations required before setting the new mode. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*mode_set)(struct drm_encoder *encoder, + struct drm_display_mode *mode, + struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis> + <para> + Set a new mode. Depending on the device requirements, the mode can + be stored internally by the driver and applied in the + <methodname>commit</methodname> operation, or programmed to the + hardware immediately. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>void (*commit)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis> + <para> + Commit a mode. This operation is called after setting the new mode. + Upon return the device must use the new mode and be fully + operational. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>Connector Helper Operations</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>struct drm_encoder *(*best_encoder)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis> + <para> + Return a pointer to the best encoder for the connecter. Device that + map connectors to encoders 1:1 simply return the pointer to the + associated encoder. This operation is mandatory. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*get_modes)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis> + <para> + Fill the connector's <structfield>probed_modes</structfield> list + by parsing EDID data with <function>drm_add_edid_modes</function> or + calling <function>drm_mode_probed_add</function> directly for every + supported mode and return the number of modes it has detected. This + operation is mandatory. + </para> + <para> + When adding modes manually the driver creates each mode with a call to + <function>drm_mode_create</function> and must fill the following fields. + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>__u32 type;</synopsis> + <para> + Mode type bitmask, a combination of + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_BUILTIN</term> + <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_CLOCK_C</term> + <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_CRTC_C</term> + <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term> + DRM_MODE_TYPE_PREFERRED - The preferred mode for the connector + </term> + <listitem> + <para>not used?</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_DEFAULT</term> + <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_USERDEF</term> + <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_DRIVER</term> + <listitem> + <para> + The mode has been created by the driver (as opposed to + to user-created modes). + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + Drivers must set the DRM_MODE_TYPE_DRIVER bit for all modes they + create, and set the DRM_MODE_TYPE_PREFERRED bit for the preferred + mode. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>__u32 clock;</synopsis> + <para>Pixel clock frequency in kHz unit</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>__u16 hdisplay, hsync_start, hsync_end, htotal; + __u16 vdisplay, vsync_start, vsync_end, vtotal;</synopsis> + <para>Horizontal and vertical timing information</para> + <screen><![CDATA[ + Active Front Sync Back + Region Porch Porch + <-----------------------><----------------><-------------><--------------> + + //////////////////////| + ////////////////////// | + ////////////////////// |.................. ................ + _______________ + + <----- [hv]display -----> + <------------- [hv]sync_start ------------> + <--------------------- [hv]sync_end ---------------------> + <-------------------------------- [hv]total -----------------------------> +]]></screen> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>__u16 hskew; + __u16 vscan;</synopsis> + <para>Unknown</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>__u32 flags;</synopsis> + <para> + Mode flags, a combination of + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PHSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Horizontal sync is active high + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NHSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Horizontal sync is active low + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PVSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Vertical sync is active high + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NVSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Vertical sync is active low + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_INTERLACE</term> + <listitem><para> + Mode is interlaced + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_DBLSCAN</term> + <listitem><para> + Mode uses doublescan + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_CSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Mode uses composite sync + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PCSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Composite sync is active high + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NCSYNC</term> + <listitem><para> + Composite sync is active low + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_HSKEW</term> + <listitem><para> + hskew provided (not used?) + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_BCAST</term> + <listitem><para> + not used? + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PIXMUX</term> + <listitem><para> + not used? + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_DBLCLK</term> + <listitem><para> + not used? + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_CLKDIV2</term> + <listitem><para> + ? + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </para> + <para> + Note that modes marked with the INTERLACE or DBLSCAN flags will be + filtered out by + <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function> if + the connector's <structfield>interlace_allowed</structfield> or + <structfield>doublescan_allowed</structfield> field is set to 0. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>char name[DRM_DISPLAY_MODE_LEN];</synopsis> + <para> + Mode name. The driver must call + <function>drm_mode_set_name</function> to fill the mode name from + <structfield>hdisplay</structfield>, + <structfield>vdisplay</structfield> and interlace flag after + filling the corresponding fields. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + <para> + The <structfield>vrefresh</structfield> value is computed by + <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function>. + </para> + <para> + When parsing EDID data, <function>drm_add_edid_modes</function> fill the + connector <structfield>display_info</structfield> + <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and + <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields. When creating modes + manually the <methodname>get_modes</methodname> helper operation must + set the <structfield>display_info</structfield> + <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and + <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields if they haven't been set + already (for instance at initilization time when a fixed-size panel is + attached to the connector). The mode <structfield>width_mm</structfield> + and <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields are only used internally + during EDID parsing and should not be set when creating modes manually. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*mode_valid)(struct drm_connector *connector, + struct drm_display_mode *mode);</synopsis> + <para> + Verify whether a mode is valid for the connector. Return MODE_OK for + supported modes and one of the enum drm_mode_status values (MODE_*) + for unsupported modes. This operation is mandatory. + </para> + <para> + As the mode rejection reason is currently not used beside for + immediately removing the unsupported mode, an implementation can + return MODE_BAD regardless of the exact reason why the mode is not + valid. + </para> + <note><para> + Note that the <methodname>mode_valid</methodname> helper operation is + only called for modes detected by the device, and + <emphasis>not</emphasis> for modes set by the user through the CRTC + <methodname>set_config</methodname> operation. + </para></note> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </sect2> </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>Memory management</title> + <!-- Internals: vertical blanking --> + + <sect1 id="drm-vertical-blank"> + <title>Vertical Blanking</title> + <para> + Vertical blanking plays a major role in graphics rendering. To achieve + tear-free display, users must synchronize page flips and/or rendering to + vertical blanking. The DRM API offers ioctls to perform page flips + synchronized to vertical blanking and wait for vertical blanking. + </para> + <para> + The DRM core handles most of the vertical blanking management logic, which + involves filtering out spurious interrupts, keeping race-free blanking + counters, coping with counter wrap-around and resets and keeping use + counts. It relies on the driver to generate vertical blanking interrupts + and optionally provide a hardware vertical blanking counter. Drivers must + implement the following operations. + </para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <synopsis>int (*enable_vblank) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc); +void (*disable_vblank) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc);</synopsis> + <para> + Enable or disable vertical blanking interrupts for the given CRTC. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <synopsis>u32 (*get_vblank_counter) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc);</synopsis> + <para> + Retrieve the value of the vertical blanking counter for the given + CRTC. If the hardware maintains a vertical blanking counter its value + should be returned. Otherwise drivers can use the + <function>drm_vblank_count</function> helper function to handle this + operation. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> <para> - The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations; it - is required to support advanced client features like OpenGL - pbuffers. The DRM currently contains two memory managers: TTM - and GEM. + Drivers must initialize the vertical blanking handling core with a call to + <function>drm_vblank_init</function> in their + <methodname>load</methodname> operation. The function will set the struct + <structname>drm_device</structname> + <structfield>vblank_disable_allowed</structfield> field to 0. This will + keep vertical blanking interrupts enabled permanently until the first mode + set operation, where <structfield>vblank_disable_allowed</structfield> is + set to 1. The reason behind this is not clear. Drivers can set the field + to 1 after <function>calling drm_vblank_init</function> to make vertical + blanking interrupts dynamically managed from the beginning. </para> + <para> + Vertical blanking interrupts can be enabled by the DRM core or by drivers + themselves (for instance to handle page flipping operations). The DRM core + maintains a vertical blanking use count to ensure that the interrupts are + not disabled while a user still needs them. To increment the use count, + drivers call <function>drm_vblank_get</function>. Upon return vertical + blanking interrupts are guaranteed to be enabled. + </para> + <para> + To decrement the use count drivers call + <function>drm_vblank_put</function>. Only when the use count drops to zero + will the DRM core disable the vertical blanking interrupts after a delay + by scheduling a timer. The delay is accessible through the vblankoffdelay + module parameter or the <varname>drm_vblank_offdelay</varname> global + variable and expressed in milliseconds. Its default value is 5000 ms. + </para> + <para> + When a vertical blanking interrupt occurs drivers only need to call the + <function>drm_handle_vblank</function> function to account for the + interrupt. + </para> + <para> + Resources allocated by <function>drm_vblank_init</function> must be freed + with a call to <function>drm_vblank_cleanup</function> in the driver + <methodname>unload</methodname> operation handler. + </para> + </sect1> + + <!-- Internals: open/close, file operations and ioctls --> + <sect1> + <title>Open/Close, File Operations and IOCTLs</title> <sect2> - <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title> + <title>Open and Close</title> + <synopsis>int (*firstopen) (struct drm_device *); +void (*lastclose) (struct drm_device *); +int (*open) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *); +void (*preclose) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *); +void (*postclose) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *);</synopsis> + <abstract>Open and close handlers. None of those methods are mandatory. + </abstract> <para> - TTM was developed by Tungsten Graphics, primarily by Thomas - Hellström, and is intended to be a flexible, high performance - graphics memory manager. + The <methodname>firstopen</methodname> method is called by the DRM core + when an application opens a device that has no other opened file handle. + Similarly the <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method is called when + the last application holding a file handle opened on the device closes + it. Both methods are mostly used for UMS (User Mode Setting) drivers to + acquire and release device resources which should be done in the + <methodname>load</methodname> and <methodname>unload</methodname> + methods for KMS drivers. </para> <para> - Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver - structure. + Note that the <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method is also called + at module unload time or, for hot-pluggable devices, when the device is + unplugged. The <methodname>firstopen</methodname> and + <methodname>lastclose</methodname> calls can thus be unbalanced. </para> <para> - TTM design background and information belongs here. + The <methodname>open</methodname> method is called every time the device + is opened by an application. Drivers can allocate per-file private data + in this method and store them in the struct + <structname>drm_file</structname> <structfield>driver_priv</structfield> + field. Note that the <methodname>open</methodname> method is called + before <methodname>firstopen</methodname>. + </para> + <para> + The close operation is split into <methodname>preclose</methodname> and + <methodname>postclose</methodname> methods. Drivers must stop and + cleanup all per-file operations in the <methodname>preclose</methodname> + method. For instance pending vertical blanking and page flip events must + be cancelled. No per-file operation is allowed on the file handle after + returning from the <methodname>preclose</methodname> method. + </para> + <para> + Finally the <methodname>postclose</methodname> method is called as the + last step of the close operation, right before calling the + <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method if no other open file handle + exists for the device. Drivers that have allocated per-file private data + in the <methodname>open</methodname> method should free it here. + </para> + <para> + The <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method should restore CRTC and + plane properties to default value, so that a subsequent open of the + device will not inherit state from the previous user. </para> </sect2> - <sect2> - <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title> + <title>File Operations</title> + <synopsis>const struct file_operations *fops</synopsis> + <abstract>File operations for the DRM device node.</abstract> <para> - GEM is an Intel project, authored by Eric Anholt and Keith - Packard. It provides simpler interfaces than TTM, and is well - suited for UMA devices. + Drivers must define the file operations structure that forms the DRM + userspace API entry point, even though most of those operations are + implemented in the DRM core. The <methodname>open</methodname>, + <methodname>release</methodname> and <methodname>ioctl</methodname> + operations are handled by + <programlisting> + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .open = drm_open, + .release = drm_release, + .unlocked_ioctl = drm_ioctl, + #ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT + .compat_ioctl = drm_compat_ioctl, + #endif + </programlisting> </para> <para> - GEM-enabled drivers must provide gem_init_object() and - gem_free_object() callbacks to support the core memory - allocation routines. They should also provide several driver-specific - ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer - read & write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers. + Drivers that implement private ioctls that requires 32/64bit + compatibility support must provide their own + <methodname>compat_ioctl</methodname> handler that processes private + ioctls and calls <function>drm_compat_ioctl</function> for core ioctls. </para> <para> - On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: - <itemizedlist> - <listitem>Memory allocation and freeing</listitem> - <listitem>Command execution</listitem> - <listitem>Aperture management at command execution time</listitem> - </itemizedlist> - Buffer object allocation is relatively - straightforward and largely provided by Linux's shmem layer, which - provides memory to back each object. When mapped into the GTT - or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are - flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to be coherent - with the GPU. Likewise, if the CPU accesses an object after the GPU - has finished rendering to the object, then the object must be made - coherent with the CPU's view - of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds. - This core CPU<->GPU coherency management is provided by a - device-specific ioctl, which evaluates an object's current domain and - performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object - into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, - i.e. an active render target; in that case, setting the domain - blocks the client and waits for rendering to complete before - performing any necessary flushing operations). - </para> - <para> - Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command - execution interface to clients. Client programs construct command - buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects, - and then submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to bind - all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide - necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers. - This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding - others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation - support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients. Clients must - take care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects - than can fit in the GTT; otherwise, GEM will reject them and no rendering - will occur. Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require - fence registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits - on pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence - registers than are available to the client. Such resource management - should be abstracted from the client in libdrm. + The <methodname>read</methodname> and <methodname>poll</methodname> + operations provide support for reading DRM events and polling them. They + are implemented by + <programlisting> + .poll = drm_poll, + .read = drm_read, + .fasync = drm_fasync, + .llseek = no_llseek, + </programlisting> + </para> + <para> + The memory mapping implementation varies depending on how the driver + manages memory. Pre-GEM drivers will use <function>drm_mmap</function>, + while GEM-aware drivers will use <function>drm_gem_mmap</function>. See + <xref linkend="drm-gem"/>. + <programlisting> + .mmap = drm_gem_mmap, + </programlisting> + </para> + <para> + No other file operation is supported by the DRM API. + </para> + </sect2> + <sect2> + <title>IOCTLs</title> + <synopsis>struct drm_ioctl_desc *ioctls; +int num_ioctls;</synopsis> + <abstract>Driver-specific ioctls descriptors table.</abstract> + <para> + Driver-specific ioctls numbers start at DRM_COMMAND_BASE. The ioctls + descriptors table is indexed by the ioctl number offset from the base + value. Drivers can use the DRM_IOCTL_DEF_DRV() macro to initialize the + table entries. + </para> + <para> + <programlisting>DRM_IOCTL_DEF_DRV(ioctl, func, flags)</programlisting> + <para> + <parameter>ioctl</parameter> is the ioctl name. Drivers must define + the DRM_##ioctl and DRM_IOCTL_##ioctl macros to the ioctl number + offset from DRM_COMMAND_BASE and the ioctl number respectively. The + first macro is private to the device while the second must be exposed + to userspace in a public header. + </para> + <para> + <parameter>func</parameter> is a pointer to the ioctl handler function + compatible with the <type>drm_ioctl_t</type> type. + <programlisting>typedef int drm_ioctl_t(struct drm_device *dev, void *data, + struct drm_file *file_priv);</programlisting> + </para> + <para> + <parameter>flags</parameter> is a bitmask combination of the following + values. It restricts how the ioctl is allowed to be called. + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + DRM_AUTH - Only authenticated callers allowed + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + DRM_MASTER - The ioctl can only be called on the master file + handle + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + DRM_ROOT_ONLY - Only callers with the SYSADMIN capability allowed + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + DRM_CONTROL_ALLOW - The ioctl can only be called on a control + device + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + DRM_UNLOCKED - The ioctl handler will be called without locking + the DRM global mutex + </para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> </para> </sect2> - - </sect1> - - <!-- Output management --> - <sect1> - <title>Output management</title> - <para> - At the core of the DRM output management code is a set of - structures representing CRTCs, encoders, and connectors. - </para> - <para> - A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that - contains a pointer to a scanout buffer. Therefore, the number - of CRTCs available determines how many independent scanout - buffers can be active at any given time. The CRTC structure - contains several fields to support this: a pointer to some video - memory, a display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video - memory to support panning or configurations where one piece of - video memory spans multiple CRTCs. - </para> - <para> - An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a - format suitable for any attached connectors. On some devices, - it may be possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one - encoder. In that case, both encoders would receive data from - the same scanout buffer, resulting in a "cloned" display - configuration across the connectors attached to each encoder. - </para> - <para> - A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device, - and usually connects directly to an external display device like - a monitor or laptop panel. A connector can only be attached to - one encoder at a time. The connector is also the structure - where information about the attached display is kept, so it - contains fields for display data, EDID data, DPMS & - connection status, and information about modes supported on the - attached displays. - </para> -<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c--> - </sect1> - - <sect1> - <title>Framebuffer management</title> - <para> - Clients need to provide a framebuffer object which provides a source - of pixels for a CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) and ultimately the - connector(s). A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver-specific memory - object, made into an opaque handle by the DRM's addfb() function. - Once a framebuffer has been created this way, it may be passed to the - KMS mode setting routines for use in a completed configuration. - </para> </sect1> <sect1> @@ -812,15 +2355,24 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) </para> </sect1> + <!-- Internals: suspend/resume --> + <sect1> - <title>Suspend/resume</title> + <title>Suspend/Resume</title> + <para> + The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers wanting full + suspend/resume support should provide save() and restore() functions. + These are called at suspend, hibernate, or resume time, and should perform + any state save or restore required by your device across suspend or + hibernate states. + </para> + <synopsis>int (*suspend) (struct drm_device *, pm_message_t state); +int (*resume) (struct drm_device *);</synopsis> <para> - The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers - wanting full suspend/resume support should provide save() and - restore() functions. These are called at suspend, - hibernate, or resume time, and should perform any state save or - restore required by your device across suspend or hibernate - states. + Those are legacy suspend and resume methods. New driver should use the + power management interface provided by their bus type (usually through + the struct <structname>device_driver</structname> dev_pm_ops) and set + these methods to NULL. </para> </sect1> @@ -833,6 +2385,35 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) </sect1> </chapter> +<!-- TODO + +- Add a glossary +- Document the struct_mutex catch-all lock +- Document connector properties + +- Why is the load method optional? +- What are drivers supposed to set the initial display state to, and how? + Connector's DPMS states are not initialized and are thus equal to + DRM_MODE_DPMS_ON. The fbcon compatibility layer calls + drm_helper_disable_unused_functions(), which disables unused encoders and + CRTCs, but doesn't touch the connectors' DPMS state, and + drm_helper_connector_dpms() in reaction to fbdev blanking events. Do drivers + that don't implement (or just don't use) fbcon compatibility need to call + those functions themselves? +- KMS drivers must call drm_vblank_pre_modeset() and drm_vblank_post_modeset() + around mode setting. Should this be done in the DRM core? +- vblank_disable_allowed is set to 1 in the first drm_vblank_post_modeset() + call and never set back to 0. It seems to be safe to permanently set it to 1 + in drm_vblank_init() for KMS driver, and it might be safe for UMS drivers as + well. This should be investigated. +- crtc and connector .save and .restore operations are only used internally in + drivers, should they be removed from the core? +- encoder mid-layer .save and .restore operations are only used internally in + drivers, should they be removed from the core? +- encoder mid-layer .detect operation is only used internally in drivers, + should it be removed from the core? +--> + <!-- External interfaces --> <chapter id="drmExternals"> @@ -853,6 +2434,42 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here. We only need high-level info, since man pages should cover the rest. </para> + + <!-- External: vblank handling --> + + <sect1> + <title>VBlank event handling</title> + <para> + The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls: + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK</term> + <listitem> + <para> + This takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure as its argument, + and it is used to block or request a signal when a specified + vblank event occurs. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL</term> + <listitem> + <para> + This should be called by application level drivers before and + after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank + counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots + the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the + _DRM_PRE_MODESET command, so that the counter won't go backwards + (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c--> + </para> + </sect1> + </chapter> <!-- API reference --> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile index 3625209..9b7e4c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media-entities.tmpl: $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml @( \ for ident in $(IOCTLS) ; do \ entity=`echo $$ident | tr _ -` ; \ - id=`grep "<refname>$$ident" $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/vidioc-*.xml | sed -r s,"^.*/(.*).xml.*","\1",` ; \ + id=`grep "<refname>$$ident" $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/vidioc-*.xml $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media-ioc-*.xml | sed -r s,"^.*/(.*).xml.*","\1",` ; \ echo "<!ENTITY $$entity \"<link" \ "linkend='$$id'><constant>$$ident</constant></link>\">" \ >>$@ ; \ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml index d643862..a7ea56c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml @@ -1,12 +1,16 @@ <title>DVB Audio Device</title> <para>The DVB audio device controls the MPEG2 audio decoder of the DVB hardware. It can be accessed through <emphasis role="tt">/dev/dvb/adapter0/audio0</emphasis>. Data types and and -ioctl definitions can be accessed by including <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/video.h</emphasis> in your +ioctl definitions can be accessed by including <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/audio.h</emphasis> in your application. </para> <para>Please note that some DVB cards don’t have their own MPEG decoder, which results in the omission of the audio and video device. </para> +<para> +These ioctls were also used by V4L2 to control MPEG decoders implemented in V4L2. The use +of these ioctls for that purpose has been made obsolete and proper V4L2 ioctls or controls +have been created to replace that functionality.</para> <section id="audio_data_types"> <title>Audio Data Types</title> @@ -558,6 +562,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SELECT_SOURCE</title> role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SET_MUTE</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; with the <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START_MUTE_AUDIO</constant> flag instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call asks the audio device to mute the stream that is currently being @@ -730,6 +736,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SET_BYPASS_MODE</title> role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_CHANNEL_SELECT</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +<constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK</constant> control instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to select the requested channel if possible.</para> @@ -772,6 +780,109 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_CHANNEL_SELECT</title> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> &return-value-dvb; +</section><section id="AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT" +role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. It has been replaced by +the V4L2 <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK</constant> control +for MPEG decoders controlled through V4L2.</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to select the requested channel for bilingual streams if possible.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT, audio_channel_select_t);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>audio_channel_select_t +ch</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Select the output format of the audio (mono left/right, + stereo).</para> +</entry> + </row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + +</section><section id="AUDIO_GET_PTS" +role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_GET_PTS</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. If you need this functionality, +then please contact the linux-media mailing list (&v4l-ml;).</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to return the current PTS timestamp.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + AUDIO_GET_PTS, __u64 *pts);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals AUDIO_GET_PTS for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u64 *pts +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Returns the 33-bit timestamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 / ISO/IEC 13818-1. +</para> +<para> +The PTS should belong to the currently played +frame if possible, but may also be a value close to it +like the PTS of the last decoded frame or the last PTS +extracted by the PES parser.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + </section><section id="AUDIO_GET_STATUS" role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_GET_STATUS</title> <para>DESCRIPTION diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml index 5c4adb4..85eaf4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml @@ -226,4 +226,357 @@ typedef struct ca_pid { </entry> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> </section> + +<section id="CA_RESET" +role="subsection"><title>CA_RESET</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_RESET); +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_RESET for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_GET_CAP" +role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_CAP</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_CAP, + ca_caps_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_GET_CAP for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_caps_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_GET_SLOT_INFO" +role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_SLOT_INFO</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_SLOT_INFO, + ca_slot_info_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_GET_SLOT_INFO for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_slot_info_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_GET_DESCR_INFO" +role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_DESCR_INFO</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_DESCR_INFO, + ca_descr_info_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_GET_DESCR_INFO for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_descr_info_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_GET_MSG" +role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_MSG</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_MSG, + ca_msg_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_GET_MSG for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_msg_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_SEND_MSG" +role="subsection"><title>CA_SEND_MSG</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SEND_MSG, + ca_msg_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_SEND_MSG for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_msg_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_SET_DESCR" +role="subsection"><title>CA_SET_DESCR</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SET_DESCR, + ca_descr_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_SET_DESCR for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_descr_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="CA_SET_PID" +role="subsection"><title>CA_SET_PID</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SET_PID, + ca_pid_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals CA_SET_PID for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>ca_pid_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml index 37c1790..86de89c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml @@ -899,4 +899,232 @@ typedef enum { <para>Invalid stc number.</para> </entry> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - </section></section> + </section> + +<section id="DMX_GET_PES_PIDS" +role="subsection"><title>DMX_GET_PES_PIDS</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_GET_PES_PIDS, + __u16[5]);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals DMX_GET_PES_PIDS for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u16[5] +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="DMX_GET_CAPS" +role="subsection"><title>DMX_GET_CAPS</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_GET_CAPS, + dmx_caps_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals DMX_GET_CAPS for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>dmx_caps_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="DMX_SET_SOURCE" +role="subsection"><title>DMX_SET_SOURCE</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_SET_SOURCE, + dmx_source_t *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals DMX_SET_SOURCE for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>dmx_source_t * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="DMX_ADD_PID" +role="subsection"><title>DMX_ADD_PID</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_ADD_PID, + __u16 *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals DMX_ADD_PID for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u16 * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="DMX_REMOVE_PID" +role="subsection"><title>DMX_REMOVE_PID</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_REMOVE_PID, + __u16 *);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals DMX_REMOVE_PID for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u16 * +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + + +</section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml index 2ab6ddc..757488b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ <holder>Convergence GmbH</holder> </copyright> <copyright> - <year>2009-2011</year> + <year>2009-2012</year> <holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Added ISDB-T test originally written by Patrick Boettcher <title>LINUX DVB API</title> -<subtitle>Version 5.2</subtitle> +<subtitle>Version 5.8</subtitle> <!-- ADD THE CHAPTERS HERE --> <chapter id="dvb_introdution"> &sub-intro; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index e633c09..957e3ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -194,6 +194,7 @@ get/set up to 64 properties. The actual meaning of each property is described on APSK_16, APSK_32, DQPSK, + QAM_4_NR, } fe_modulation_t; </programlisting> </section> @@ -265,6 +266,7 @@ typedef enum fe_code_rate { FEC_AUTO, FEC_3_5, FEC_9_10, + FEC_2_5, } fe_code_rate_t; </programlisting> <para>which correspond to error correction rates of 1/2, 2/3, etc., @@ -351,7 +353,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system { SYS_ISDBC, SYS_ATSC, SYS_ATSCMH, - SYS_DMBTH, + SYS_DTMB, SYS_CMMB, SYS_DAB, SYS_DVBT2, @@ -567,28 +569,33 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system { <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_MODE</constant></title> <para>RS frame mode.</para> <para>Possible values are:</para> + <para id="atscmh-rs-frame-mode"> <programlisting> typedef enum atscmh_rs_frame_mode { ATSCMH_RSFRAME_PRI_ONLY = 0, ATSCMH_RSFRAME_PRI_SEC = 1, } atscmh_rs_frame_mode_t; </programlisting> + </para> </section> <section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-ENSEMBLE"> <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_ENSEMBLE</constant></title> <para>RS frame ensemble.</para> <para>Possible values are:</para> + <para id="atscmh-rs-frame-ensemble"> <programlisting> typedef enum atscmh_rs_frame_ensemble { ATSCMH_RSFRAME_ENS_PRI = 0, ATSCMH_RSFRAME_ENS_SEC = 1, } atscmh_rs_frame_ensemble_t; </programlisting> + </para> </section> <section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-PRI"> <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_PRI</constant></title> <para>RS code mode (primary).</para> <para>Possible values are:</para> + <para id="atscmh-rs-code-mode"> <programlisting> typedef enum atscmh_rs_code_mode { ATSCMH_RSCODE_211_187 = 0, @@ -596,6 +603,7 @@ typedef enum atscmh_rs_code_mode { ATSCMH_RSCODE_235_187 = 2, } atscmh_rs_code_mode_t; </programlisting> + </para> </section> <section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-SEC"> <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_SEC</constant></title> @@ -613,23 +621,27 @@ typedef enum atscmh_rs_code_mode { <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_BLOCK_MODE</constant></title> <para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Block Mode.</para> <para>Possible values are:</para> + <para id="atscmh-sccc-block-mode"> <programlisting> typedef enum atscmh_sccc_block_mode { ATSCMH_SCCC_BLK_SEP = 0, ATSCMH_SCCC_BLK_COMB = 1, } atscmh_sccc_block_mode_t; </programlisting> + </para> </section> <section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-A"> <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_A</constant></title> <para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Rate.</para> <para>Possible values are:</para> + <para id="atscmh-sccc-code-mode"> <programlisting> typedef enum atscmh_sccc_code_mode { ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_HLF = 0, ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_QTR = 1, } atscmh_sccc_code_mode_t; </programlisting> + </para> </section> <section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-B"> <title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_B</constant></title> @@ -725,6 +737,9 @@ typedef enum fe_guard_interval { GUARD_INTERVAL_1_128, GUARD_INTERVAL_19_128, GUARD_INTERVAL_19_256, + GUARD_INTERVAL_PN420, + GUARD_INTERVAL_PN595, + GUARD_INTERVAL_PN945, } fe_guard_interval_t; </programlisting> @@ -733,6 +748,7 @@ typedef enum fe_guard_interval { try to find the correct guard interval (if capable) and will use TMCC to fill in the missing parameters.</para> <para>2) Intervals 1/128, 19/128 and 19/256 are used only for DVB-T2 at present</para> + <para>3) DTMB specifies PN420, PN595 and PN945.</para> </section> <section id="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"> <title><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></title> @@ -749,6 +765,8 @@ typedef enum fe_transmit_mode { TRANSMISSION_MODE_1K, TRANSMISSION_MODE_16K, TRANSMISSION_MODE_32K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_C1, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_C3780, } fe_transmit_mode_t; </programlisting> <para>Notes:</para> @@ -760,6 +778,7 @@ typedef enum fe_transmit_mode { use TMCC to fill in the missing parameters.</para> <para>3) DVB-T specifies 2K and 8K as valid sizes.</para> <para>4) DVB-T2 specifies 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K and 32K.</para> + <para>5) DTMB specifies C1 and C3780.</para> </section> <section id="DTV-HIERARCHY"> <title><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></title> @@ -774,17 +793,28 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { } fe_hierarchy_t; </programlisting> </section> - <section id="DTV-ISDBS-TS-ID"> - <title><constant>DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID</constant></title> - <para>Currently unused.</para> + <section id="DTV-STREAM-ID"> + <title><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></title> + <para>DVB-S2, DVB-T2 and ISDB-S support the transmission of several + streams on a single transport stream. + This property enables the DVB driver to handle substream filtering, + when supported by the hardware. + By default, substream filtering is disabled. + </para><para> + For DVB-S2 and DVB-T2, the valid substream id range is from 0 to 255. + </para><para> + For ISDB, the valid substream id range is from 1 to 65535. + </para><para> + To disable it, you should use the special macro NO_STREAM_ID_FILTER. + </para><para> + Note: any value outside the id range also disables filtering. + </para> </section> - <section id="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID"> - <title><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID</constant></title> - <para>DVB-T2 supports Physical Layer Pipes (PLP) to allow transmission of - many data types via a single multiplex. The API will soon support this - at which point this section will be expanded.</para> + <section id="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID-LEGACY"> + <title><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID_LEGACY</constant></title> + <para>Obsolete, replaced with DTV_STREAM_ID.</para> </section> - <section id="DTV_ENUM_DELSYS"> + <section id="DTV-ENUM-DELSYS"> <title><constant>DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</constant></title> <para>A Multi standard frontend needs to advertise the delivery systems provided. Applications need to enumerate the provided delivery systems, before using @@ -796,6 +826,29 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { FE_GET_INFO. In the case of a legacy frontend, the result is just the same as with FE_GET_INFO, but in a more structured format </para> </section> + <section id="DTV-INTERLEAVING"> + <title><constant>DTV_INTERLEAVING</constant></title> + <para id="fe-interleaving">Interleaving mode</para> + <programlisting> +enum fe_interleaving { + INTERLEAVING_NONE, + INTERLEAVING_AUTO, + INTERLEAVING_240, + INTERLEAVING_720, +}; + </programlisting> + </section> + <section id="DTV-LNA"> + <title><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></title> + <para>Low-noise amplifier.</para> + <para>Hardware might offer controllable LNA which can be set manually + using that parameter. Usually LNA could be found only from + terrestrial devices if at all.</para> + <para>Possible values: 0, 1, LNA_AUTO</para> + <para>0, LNA off</para> + <para>1, LNA on</para> + <para>use the special macro LNA_AUTO to set LNA auto</para> + </section> </section> <section id="frontend-property-terrestrial-systems"> <title>Properties used on terrestrial delivery systems</title> @@ -816,6 +869,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-HIERARCHY"><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> <section id="dvbt2-params"> @@ -838,7 +892,8 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-HIERARCHY"><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID"><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> <section id="isdbt"> @@ -925,13 +980,32 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-PRC"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_PRC</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-MODE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-ENSEMBLE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_ENSEMBLE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-CODE-MODE-PRI"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_CODE_MODE_PRI</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-CODE-MODE-SEC"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_CODE_MODE_SEC</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-PRI"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_PRI</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-SEC"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_SEC</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-BLOCK-MODE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_BLOCK_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE_MODE-A"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_A</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE_MODE-B"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_B</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE_MODE-C"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_C</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE_MODE-D"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_D</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-A"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_A</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-B"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_B</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-C"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_C</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-D"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_D</constant></link></para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section id="dtmb-params"> + <title>DTMB delivery system</title> + <para>The following parameters are valid for DTMB:</para> + <itemizedlist mark='opencircle'> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-API-VERSION"><constant>DTV_API_VERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DELIVERY-SYSTEM"><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TUNE"><constant>DTV_TUNE</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-CLEAR"><constant>DTV_CLEAR</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-BANDWIDTH-HZ"><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INTERLEAVING"><constant>DTV_INTERLEAVING</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> </section> @@ -952,6 +1026,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> <section id="dvbc-annex-b-params"> @@ -966,6 +1041,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> </section> @@ -999,6 +1075,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-PILOT"><constant>DTV_PILOT</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ROLLOFF"><constant>DTV_ROLLOFF</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> <section id="turbo-params"> @@ -1021,7 +1098,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-VOLTAGE"><constant>DTV_VOLTAGE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ISDBS-TS-ID"><constant>DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml index aeaed59..426c252 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ supported via the new <link linkend="FE_GET_SET_PROPERTY">FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_GET <para>The usage of this field is deprecated, as it doesn't report all supported standards, and will provide an incomplete information for frontends that support multiple delivery systems. -Please use <link linkend="DTV_ENUM_DELSYS">DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</link> instead.</para> +Please use <link linkend="DTV-ENUM-DELSYS">DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</link> instead.</para> </section> <section id="fe-caps-t"> @@ -101,6 +101,7 @@ a specific frontend type.</para> FE_CAN_8VSB = 0x200000, FE_CAN_16VSB = 0x400000, FE_HAS_EXTENDED_CAPS = 0x800000, + FE_CAN_MULTISTREAM = 0x4000000, FE_CAN_TURBO_FEC = 0x8000000, FE_CAN_2G_MODULATION = 0x10000000, FE_NEEDS_BENDING = 0x20000000, @@ -207,18 +208,44 @@ spec.</para> <para>Several functions of the frontend device use the fe_status data type defined by</para> <programlisting> - typedef enum fe_status { - FE_HAS_SIGNAL = 0x01, /⋆ found something above the noise level ⋆/ - FE_HAS_CARRIER = 0x02, /⋆ found a DVB signal ⋆/ - FE_HAS_VITERBI = 0x04, /⋆ FEC is stable ⋆/ - FE_HAS_SYNC = 0x08, /⋆ found sync bytes ⋆/ - FE_HAS_LOCK = 0x10, /⋆ everything's working... ⋆/ - FE_TIMEDOUT = 0x20, /⋆ no lock within the last ~2 seconds ⋆/ - FE_REINIT = 0x40 /⋆ frontend was reinitialized, ⋆/ - } fe_status_t; /⋆ application is recommned to reset ⋆/ +typedef enum fe_status { + FE_HAS_SIGNAL = 0x01, + FE_HAS_CARRIER = 0x02, + FE_HAS_VITERBI = 0x04, + FE_HAS_SYNC = 0x08, + FE_HAS_LOCK = 0x10, + FE_TIMEDOUT = 0x20, + FE_REINIT = 0x40, +} fe_status_t; </programlisting> -<para>to indicate the current state and/or state changes of the frontend hardware. -</para> +<para>to indicate the current state and/or state changes of the frontend hardware: +</para> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> +<entry align="char">FE_HAS_SIGNAL</entry> +<entry align="char">The frontend has found something above the noise level</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_HAS_CARRIER</entry> +<entry align="char">The frontend has found a DVB signal</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_HAS_VITERBI</entry> +<entry align="char">The frontend FEC code is stable</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_HAS_SYNC</entry> +<entry align="char">Syncronization bytes was found</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_HAS_LOCK</entry> +<entry align="char">The DVB were locked and everything is working</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_TIMEDOUT</entry> +<entry align="char">no lock within the last about 2 seconds</entry> +</row><row> +<entry align="char">FE_REINIT</entry> +<entry align="char">The frontend was reinitialized, application is +recommended to reset DiSEqC, tone and parameters</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> </section> @@ -238,7 +265,7 @@ and to add newer delivery systems.</para> <constant>FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_SET_PROPERTY</constant></link> instead, in order to be able to support the newer System Delivery like DVB-S2, DVB-T2, DVB-C2, ISDB, etc.</para> -<para>All kinds of parameters are combined as an union in the FrontendParameters structure:</para> +<para>All kinds of parameters are combined as an union in the FrontendParameters structure: <programlisting> struct dvb_frontend_parameters { uint32_t frequency; /⋆ (absolute) frequency in Hz for QAM/OFDM ⋆/ @@ -251,12 +278,13 @@ struct dvb_frontend_parameters { struct dvb_vsb_parameters vsb; } u; }; -</programlisting> +</programlisting></para> <para>In the case of QPSK frontends the <constant>frequency</constant> field specifies the intermediate frequency, i.e. the offset which is effectively added to the local oscillator frequency (LOF) of the LNB. The intermediate frequency has to be specified in units of kHz. For QAM and OFDM frontends the <constant>frequency</constant> specifies the absolute frequency and is given in Hz. </para> + <section id="dvb-qpsk-parameters"> <title>QPSK parameters</title> <para>For satellite QPSK frontends you have to use the <constant>dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant> structure:</para> @@ -321,8 +349,8 @@ itself. <section id="fe-code-rate-t"> <title>frontend code rate</title> <para>The possible values for the <constant>fec_inner</constant> field used on -<link refend="dvb-qpsk-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link> and -<link refend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> are: +<link linkend="dvb-qpsk-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link> and +<link linkend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> are: </para> <programlisting> typedef enum fe_code_rate { @@ -347,9 +375,9 @@ detection. <section id="fe-modulation-t"> <title>frontend modulation type for QAM, OFDM and VSB</title> <para>For cable and terrestrial frontends, e. g. for -<link refend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link>, -<link refend="dvb-ofdm-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> and -<link refend="dvb-vsb-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link>, +<link linkend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link>, +<link linkend="dvb-ofdm-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> and +<link linkend="dvb-vsb-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link>, it needs to specify the quadrature modulation mode which can be one of the following: </para> <programlisting> @@ -370,8 +398,8 @@ it needs to specify the quadrature modulation mode which can be one of the follo } fe_modulation_t; </programlisting> </section> -<para>Finally, there are several more parameters for OFDM: -</para> +<section> +<title>More OFDM parameters</title> <section id="fe-transmit-mode-t"> <title>Number of carriers per channel</title> <programlisting> @@ -427,6 +455,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { } fe_hierarchy_t; </programlisting> </section> +</section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml index 170064a..2048b53 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ a partial path like:</para> additional include file <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/version.h</emphasis> exists, which defines the constant <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION</emphasis>. This document -describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 5.4</emphasis>. +describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 5.8</emphasis>. </para> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml index 6c67481..6c11ec5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <para>The kernel demux API defines a driver-internal interface for registering low-level, hardware specific driver to a hardware independent demux layer. It is only of interest for DVB device driver writers. The header file for this API is named <emphasis role="tt">demux.h</emphasis> and located in -<emphasis role="tt">drivers/media/dvb/dvb-core</emphasis>. +<emphasis role="tt">drivers/media/dvb-core</emphasis>. </para> <para>Maintainer note: This section must be reviewed. It is probably out of date. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml index 67d37e5..a193e86 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml @@ -26,4 +26,131 @@ struct dvb_net_if { <title>DVB net Function Calls</title> <para>To be written… </para> + +<section id="NET_ADD_IF" +role="subsection"><title>NET_ADD_IF</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_ADD_IF, + struct dvb_net_if *if);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals NET_ADD_IF for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct dvb_net_if *if +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="NET_REMOVE_IF" +role="subsection"><title>NET_REMOVE_IF</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_REMOVE_IF); +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals NET_REMOVE_IF for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> + +<section id="NET_GET_IF" +role="subsection"><title>NET_GET_IF</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_GET_IF, + struct dvb_net_if *if);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals NET_GET_IF for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct dvb_net_if *if +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Undocumented.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; +</section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml index 25fb823..3ea1ca7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml @@ -15,6 +15,10 @@ the audio and video device as well as the video4linux device. <para>The ioctls that deal with SPUs (sub picture units) and navigation packets are only supported on some MPEG decoders made for DVD playback. </para> +<para> +These ioctls were also used by V4L2 to control MPEG decoders implemented in V4L2. The use +of these ioctls for that purpose has been made obsolete and proper V4L2 ioctls or controls +have been created to replace that functionality.</para> <section id="video_types"> <title>Video Data Types</title> @@ -55,7 +59,7 @@ typedef enum { </section> <section id="video-stream-source-t"> -<title>video stream source</title> +<title>video_stream_source_t</title> <para>The video stream source is set through the VIDEO_SELECT_SOURCE call and can take the following values, depending on whether we are replaying from an internal (demuxer) or external (user write) source. @@ -76,7 +80,7 @@ call. </section> <section id="video-play-state-t"> -<title>video play state</title> +<title>video_play_state_t</title> <para>The following values can be returned by the VIDEO_GET_STATUS call representing the state of video playback. </para> @@ -90,9 +94,9 @@ typedef enum { </section> <section id="video-command"> +<title>struct video_command</title> <para>The structure must be zeroed before use by the application This ensures it can be extended safely in the future.</para> -<title>struct video-command</title> <programlisting> struct video_command { __u32 cmd; @@ -121,7 +125,7 @@ struct video_command { </section> <section id="video-size-t"> -<title>struct video_size-t</title> +<title>video_size_t</title> <programlisting> typedef struct { int w; @@ -217,7 +221,7 @@ bits set according to the hardwares capabilities. </section> <section id="video-system"> -<title>video system</title> +<title>video_system_t</title> <para>A call to VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM sets the desired video system for TV output. The following system types can be set: </para> @@ -263,7 +267,7 @@ call expects the following format for that information: </section> <section id="video-spu"> -<title>video SPU</title> +<title>struct video_spu</title> <para>Calling VIDEO_SET_SPU deactivates or activates SPU decoding, according to the following format: </para> @@ -277,12 +281,12 @@ following format: </section> <section id="video-spu-palette"> -<title>video SPU palette</title> +<title>struct video_spu_palette</title> <para>The following structure is used to set the SPU palette by calling VIDEO_SPU_PALETTE: </para> <programlisting> typedef - struct video_spu_palette{ + struct video_spu_palette { int length; uint8_t ⋆palette; } video_spu_palette_t; @@ -290,13 +294,13 @@ following format: </section> <section id="video-navi-pack"> -<title>video NAVI pack</title> +<title>struct video_navi_pack</title> <para>In order to get the navigational data the following structure has to be passed to the ioctl VIDEO_GET_NAVI: </para> <programlisting> typedef - struct video_navi_pack{ + struct video_navi_pack { int length; /⋆ 0 ... 1024 ⋆/ uint8_t data[1024]; } video_navi_pack_t; @@ -305,7 +309,7 @@ VIDEO_GET_NAVI: <section id="video-attributes-t"> -<title>video attributes</title> +<title>video_attributes_t</title> <para>The following attributes can be set by a call to VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES: </para> <programlisting> @@ -541,6 +545,8 @@ VIDEO_GET_NAVI: role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_STOP</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to stop playing the current stream. @@ -598,6 +604,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_STOP</title> role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_PLAY</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to start playing a video stream from the @@ -634,6 +642,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_PLAY</title> role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_FREEZE</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call suspends the live video stream being played. Decoding @@ -674,6 +684,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_FREEZE</title> role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_CONTINUE</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call restarts decoding and playing processes of the video stream @@ -710,6 +722,9 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_CONTINUE</title> role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_SELECT_SOURCE</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. This ioctl was also supported by the +V4L2 ivtv driver, but that has been replaced by the ivtv-specific +<constant>IVTV_IOC_PASSTHROUGH_MODE</constant> ioctl.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call informs the video device which source shall be used for the input @@ -845,10 +860,160 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_STATUS</title> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> &return-value-dvb; +</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this +ioctl has been replaced by the <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME</constant> control.</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the number of displayed frames +since the decoder was started.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT, __u64 *pts);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u64 *pts +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Returns the number of frames displayed since the decoder was started. +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + +</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_PTS" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_PTS</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this +ioctl has been replaced by the <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS</constant> control.</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the current PTS timestamp.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_GET_PTS, __u64 *pts);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_PTS for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>__u64 *pts +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Returns the 33-bit timestamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 / ISO/IEC 13818-1. +</para> +<para> +The PTS should belong to the currently played +frame if possible, but may also be a value close to it +like the PTS of the last decoded frame or the last PTS +extracted by the PES parser.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + +</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the current framerate.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE, unsigned int *rate);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>unsigned int *rate +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Returns the framerate in number of frames per 1000 seconds. +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + </section><section id="VIDEO_GET_EVENT" role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_EVENT</title> <para>DESCRIPTION </para> +<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To get events from a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2 +&VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl instead.</para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> <para>This ioctl call returns an event of type video_event if available. If an event is @@ -914,6 +1079,152 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_EVENT</title> </entry> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +</section><section id="VIDEO_COMMAND" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_COMMAND</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this +ioctl has been replaced by the &VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; ioctl.</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl commands the decoder. The <constant>video_command</constant> struct +is a subset of the <constant>v4l2_decoder_cmd</constant> struct, so refer to the +&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; documentation for more information.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_COMMAND, struct video_command *cmd);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_COMMAND for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct video_command *cmd +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Commands the decoder. +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + +</section><section id="VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this +ioctl has been replaced by the &VIDIOC-TRY-DECODER-CMD; ioctl.</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl tries a decoder command. The <constant>video_command</constant> struct +is a subset of the <constant>v4l2_decoder_cmd</constant> struct, so refer to the +&VIDIOC-TRY-DECODER-CMD; documentation for more information.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND, struct video_command *cmd);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct video_command *cmd +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Try a decoder command. +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + +</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_SIZE" +role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_SIZE</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl returns the size and aspect ratio.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = + VIDEO_GET_SIZE, video_size_t *size);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int request</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_SIZE for this + command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>video_size_t *size +</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Returns the size and aspect ratio. +</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +&return-value-dvb; + </section><section id="VIDEO_SET_DISPLAY_FORMAT" role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_SET_DISPLAY_FORMAT</title> <para>DESCRIPTION diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml index 1078e45..d2eb79e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml @@ -178,23 +178,23 @@ Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications"</title> 1125-Line High-Definition Production"</title> </biblioentry> - <biblioentry id="en50067"> - <abbrev>EN 50067</abbrev> + <biblioentry id="iec62106"> + <abbrev>IEC 62106</abbrev> <authorgroup> - <corpauthor>European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization -(<ulink url="http://www.cenelec.eu">http://www.cenelec.eu</ulink>)</corpauthor> + <corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission +(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> </authorgroup> <title>Specification of the radio data system (RDS) for VHF/FM sound broadcasting in the frequency range from 87,5 to 108,0 MHz</title> </biblioentry> <biblioentry id="nrsc4"> - <abbrev>NRSC-4</abbrev> + <abbrev>NRSC-4-B</abbrev> <authorgroup> <corpauthor>National Radio Systems Committee (<ulink url="http://www.nrscstandards.org">http://www.nrscstandards.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> </authorgroup> - <title>NRSC-4: United States RBDS Standard</title> + <title>NRSC-4-B: United States RBDS Standard</title> </biblioentry> <biblioentry id="iso12232"> @@ -226,4 +226,44 @@ in the frequency range from 87,5 to 108,0 MHz</title> <title>VESA and Industry Standards and Guidelines for Computer Display Monitor Timing (DMT)</title> </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="vesaedid"> + <abbrev>EDID</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Video Electronics Standards Association +(<ulink url="http://www.vesa.org">http://www.vesa.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>VESA Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data Standard</title> + <subtitle>Release A, Revision 2</subtitle> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="hdcp"> + <abbrev>HDCP</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Digital Content Protection LLC +(<ulink url="http://www.digital-cp.com">http://www.digital-cp.com</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System</title> + <subtitle>Revision 1.3</subtitle> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="hdmi"> + <abbrev>HDMI</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>HDMI Licensing LLC +(<ulink url="http://www.hdmi.org">http://www.hdmi.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>High-Definition Multimedia Interface</title> + <subtitle>Specification Version 1.4a</subtitle> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="dp"> + <abbrev>DP</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Video Electronics Standards Association +(<ulink url="http://www.vesa.org">http://www.vesa.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>VESA DisplayPort Standard</title> + <subtitle>Version 1, Revision 2</subtitle> + </biblioentry> + </bibliography> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml index b91d253..73c6847 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ automatically.</para> <para>To query and select the standard used by the current video input or output applications call the &VIDIOC-G-STD; and &VIDIOC-S-STD; ioctl, respectively. The <emphasis>received</emphasis> -standard can be sensed with the &VIDIOC-QUERYSTD; ioctl. Note parameter of all these ioctls is a pointer to a &v4l2-std-id; type (a standard set), <emphasis>not</emphasis> an index into the standard enumeration.<footnote> +standard can be sensed with the &VIDIOC-QUERYSTD; ioctl. Note that the parameter of all these ioctls is a pointer to a &v4l2-std-id; type (a standard set), <emphasis>not</emphasis> an index into the standard enumeration.<footnote> <para>An alternative to the current scheme is to use pointers to indices as arguments of <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant> and <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant>, the &v4l2-input; and @@ -588,30 +588,28 @@ switch to a standard by &v4l2-std-id;.</para> </footnote> Drivers must implement all video standard ioctls when the device has one or more video inputs or outputs.</para> - <para>Special rules apply to USB cameras where the notion of video -standards makes little sense. More generally any capture device, -output devices accordingly, which is <itemizedlist> + <para>Special rules apply to devices such as USB cameras where the notion of video +standards makes little sense. More generally for any capture or output device +which is: <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para>incapable of capturing fields or frames at the nominal rate of the video standard, or</para> </listitem> <listitem> - <para>where <link linkend="buffer">timestamps</link> refer -to the instant the field or frame was received by the driver, not the -capture time, or</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>where <link linkend="buffer">sequence numbers</link> -refer to the frames received by the driver, not the captured -frames.</para> + <para>that does not support the video standard formats at all.</para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> Here the driver shall set the <structfield>std</structfield> field of &v4l2-input; and &v4l2-output; -to zero, the <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant>, +to zero and the <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant>, <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant>, <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYSTD</constant> and <constant>VIDIOC_ENUMSTD</constant> ioctls shall return the -&EINVAL;.<footnote> +&ENOTTY;.<footnote> + <para>See <xref linkend="buffer" /> for a rationale.</para> + <para>Applications can make use of the <xref linkend="input-capabilities" /> and +<xref linkend="output-capabilities"/> flags to determine whether the video standard ioctls +are available for the device.</para> +&ENOTTY;. <para>See <xref linkend="buffer" /> for a rationale. Probably even USB cameras follow some well known video standard. It might have been better to explicitly indicate elsewhere if a device cannot live @@ -626,9 +624,9 @@ up to normal expectations, instead of this exception.</para> &v4l2-standard; standard; if (-1 == ioctl (fd, &VIDIOC-G-STD;, &std_id)) { - /* Note when VIDIOC_ENUMSTD always returns EINVAL this + /* Note when VIDIOC_ENUMSTD always returns ENOTTY this is no video device or it falls under the USB exception, - and VIDIOC_G_STD returning EINVAL is no error. */ + and VIDIOC_G_STD returning ENOTTY is no error. */ perror ("VIDIOC_G_STD"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index faa0fd1..4fdf6b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -1476,7 +1476,7 @@ follows.<informaltable> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE_BASE</constant></entry> - <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant></entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> (but this is deprecated)</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> @@ -2468,21 +2468,9 @@ that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35. <structfield>reserved2</structfield> and removed <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT</constant>.</para> </listitem> - </orderedlist> - </section> - - <section> - <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.6</title> - <orderedlist> <listitem> <para>Added V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M and V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE capabilities.</para> </listitem> - </orderedlist> - </section> - - <section> - <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.6</title> - <orderedlist> <listitem> <para>Added support for frequency band enumerations: &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS;.</para> </listitem> @@ -2567,29 +2555,6 @@ and may change in the future.</para> <para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref linkend="osd" />.</para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>, - &v4l2-buf-type;, <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>, -&VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl, <xref linkend="device-capabilities" />.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and -&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMEINTERVALS; ioctls.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD; -ioctls.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-DECODER-CMD; -ioctls.</para> - </listitem> <listitem> <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER; ioctls.</para> @@ -2615,11 +2580,11 @@ ioctls.</para> and &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-S-SELECTION; ioctls.</para> </listitem> <listitem> - <para><link linkend="v4l2-auto-focus-area"><constant> - V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_AREA</constant></link> control.</para> + <para>Support for frequency band enumeration: &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS; ioctl.</para> </listitem> <listitem> - <para>Support for frequency band enumeration: &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS; ioctl.</para> + <para>Vendor and device specific media bus pixel formats. + <xref linkend="v4l2-mbus-vendor-spec-fmts" />.</para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml index b0964fb..7fe5be1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml @@ -1586,7 +1586,6 @@ frame counter of the frame that is currently displayed (decoded). This value is the decoder is started.</entry> </row> - <row><entry></entry></row> <row> <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_SLICE_INTERFACE</constant> </entry> @@ -2270,6 +2269,14 @@ Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders.</entry> </row> <row><entry></entry></row> + <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay"> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for +VBV buffer control.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> <row> <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE</constant> </entry> <entry>integer</entry> @@ -2334,6 +2341,265 @@ Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder.</entry> </row><row><entry spanname="descr">vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder.</entry> </row> + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING</constant> </entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement information in the encoded bitstream. +The frame packing SEI message contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing. Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0</constant> </entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type"> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE</constant> </entry> + <entry>enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI. +Applicable to the H264 encoder. +Possible values are:</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD</constant> </entry> + <entry>Pixels are alternatively from L and R.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN</constant> </entry> + <entry>L and R are interlaced by column.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW</constant> </entry> + <entry>L and R are interlaced by row.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE</constant> </entry> + <entry>L is on the left, R on the right.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM</constant> </entry> + <entry>L is on top, R on bottom.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL</constant> </entry> + <entry>One view per frame.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO</constant> </entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is a technique +used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type"> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE</constant> </entry> + <entry>enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan patterns of macroblocks. +Applicable to the H264 encoder. +Possible values are:</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES</constant> </entry> + <entry>Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run length order.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES</constant> </entry> + <entry>Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to both encoder and decoder.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER</constant> </entry> + <entry>Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT</constant> </entry> + <entry>Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN</constant> </entry> + <entry>Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN</constant> </entry> + <entry>Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT</constant> </entry> + <entry>User defined map type.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Number of slice groups in FMO. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction"> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION</constant> </entry> + <entry>enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe maps. +Applicable to the H264 encoder. +Possible values are:</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT</constant> </entry> + <entry>Raster scan or wipe right.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT</constant> </entry> + <entry>Reverse raster scan or wipe left.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved map. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO</constant> </entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder. +The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit +0 = least significant bit):</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Bit 0:15</entry> + <entry>Slice ID</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Bit 16:32</entry> + <entry>Slice position or order</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING</constant> </entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables H264 hierarchical coding. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type"> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE</constant> </entry> + <entry>enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the hierarchical coding type. +Applicable to the H264 encoder. +Possible values are:</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B</constant> </entry> + <entry>Hierarchical B coding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P</constant> </entry> + <entry>Hierarchical P coding.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers. +Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry> + </row> + + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264 encoder. +The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit +0 = least significant bit):</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Bit 0:15</entry> + <entry>QP value</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Bit 16:32</entry> + <entry>Layer number</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + </tbody> </tgroup> </table> @@ -3505,7 +3771,7 @@ This encodes up to 31 pre-defined programme types.</entry> </row> <row><entry spanname="descr">Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission. It is intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in programme service -identification and selection. In Annex E of <xref linkend="en50067" />, the RDS specification, +identification and selection. In Annex E of <xref linkend="iec62106" />, the RDS specification, there is a full description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control must be configured @@ -3519,7 +3785,7 @@ with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must always contain a string with s what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names, programme-related information or any other text. In these cases, RadioText should be used in addition to <constant>V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME</constant>. The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described -in Annex E of <xref linkend="en50067" />. The length of Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being +in Annex E of <xref linkend="iec62106" />. The length of Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block). However, it is also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured with steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of 32 or 64. </entry> @@ -3650,7 +3916,7 @@ manually or automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are driver-specif </table> <para>For more details about RDS specification, refer to -<xref linkend="en50067" /> document, from CENELEC.</para> +<xref linkend="iec62106" /> document, from CENELEC.</para> </section> <section id="flash-controls"> @@ -3717,232 +3983,231 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para> use case involving camera or individually. </para> - </section> + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="flash-control-id"> + <title>Flash Control IDs</title> + + <tgroup cols="4"> + <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" /> + <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" /> + <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" /> + <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" /> + <spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" /> + <spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" /> + <thead> + <row> + <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry> + <entry align="left">Type</entry> + </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS</constant></entry> + <entry>class</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">The FLASH class descriptor.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE</constant></entry> + <entry>menu</entry> + </row> + <row id="v4l2-flash-led-mode"> + <entry spanname="descr">Defines the mode of the flash LED, + the high-power white LED attached to the flash controller. + Setting this control may not be possible in presence of + some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE</constant></entry> + <entry>Off.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH</constant></entry> + <entry>Flash mode.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH</constant></entry> + <entry>Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE</constant></entry> + <entry>menu</entry> + </row> + <row id="v4l2-flash-strobe-source"><entry + spanname="descr">Defines the source of the flash LED + strobe.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE</constant></entry> + <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by using + the V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL</constant></entry> + <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by an + external source. Typically this is a sensor, + which makes it possible to synchronises the + flash strobe start to exposure start.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE</constant></entry> + <entry>button</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Strobe flash. Valid when + V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to + V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE + is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this + control may not be possible in presence of some faults. + See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP</constant></entry> + <entry>button</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Stop flash strobe immediately.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS</constant></entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Strobe status: whether the flash + is strobing at the moment or not. This is a read-only + control.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT</constant></entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Hardware timeout for flash. The + flash strobe is stopped after this period of time has + passed from the start of the strobe.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY</constant></entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash strobe when + the flash LED is in flash mode + (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps + (mA) if possible.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY</constant></entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash LED in + torch mode (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be + milliamps (mA) if possible. Setting this control may not + be possible in presence of some faults. See + V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY</constant></entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the indicator LED. + The indicator LED may be fully independent of the flash + LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if possible.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT</constant></entry> + <entry>bitmask</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Faults related to the flash. The + faults tell about specific problems in the flash chip + itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may prevent + further use of some of the flash controls. In particular, + V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE + if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults + have such an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults + resets the control and returns the chip to a usable state + if possible.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE</constant></entry> + <entry>Flash controller voltage to the flash LED + has exceeded the limit specific to the flash + controller.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT</constant></entry> + <entry>The flash strobe was still on when + the timeout set by the user --- + V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. + Not all flash controllers may set this in all + such conditions.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE</constant></entry> + <entry>The flash controller has overheated.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT</constant></entry> + <entry>The short circuit protection of the flash + controller has been triggered.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT</constant></entry> + <entry>Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit + specific to the flash controller.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR</constant></entry> + <entry>The flash controller has detected a short or open + circuit condition on the indicator LED.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </entrytbl> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE</constant></entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable or disable charging of the xenon + flash capacitor.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY</constant></entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Is the flash ready to strobe? + Xenon flashes require their capacitors charged before + strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period + after strobe during which another strobe will not be + possible. This is a read-only control.</entry> + </row> + <row><entry></entry></row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </section> </section> - - <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="flash-control-id"> - <title>Flash Control IDs</title> - - <tgroup cols="4"> - <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" /> - <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" /> - <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" /> - <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" /> - <spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" /> - <spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" /> - <thead> - <row> - <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry> - <entry align="left">Type</entry> - </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody valign="top"> - <row><entry></entry></row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS</constant></entry> - <entry>class</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">The FLASH class descriptor.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE</constant></entry> - <entry>menu</entry> - </row> - <row id="v4l2-flash-led-mode"> - <entry spanname="descr">Defines the mode of the flash LED, - the high-power white LED attached to the flash controller. - Setting this control may not be possible in presence of - some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE</constant></entry> - <entry>Off.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH</constant></entry> - <entry>Flash mode.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH</constant></entry> - <entry>Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </entrytbl> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE</constant></entry> - <entry>menu</entry> - </row> - <row id="v4l2-flash-strobe-source"><entry - spanname="descr">Defines the source of the flash LED - strobe.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE</constant></entry> - <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by using - the V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL</constant></entry> - <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by an - external source. Typically this is a sensor, - which makes it possible to synchronises the - flash strobe start to exposure start.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </entrytbl> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE</constant></entry> - <entry>button</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Strobe flash. Valid when - V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to - V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE - is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this - control may not be possible in presence of some faults. - See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP</constant></entry> - <entry>button</entry> - </row> - <row><entry spanname="descr">Stop flash strobe immediately.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS</constant></entry> - <entry>boolean</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Strobe status: whether the flash - is strobing at the moment or not. This is a read-only - control.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT</constant></entry> - <entry>integer</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Hardware timeout for flash. The - flash strobe is stopped after this period of time has - passed from the start of the strobe.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY</constant></entry> - <entry>integer</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash strobe when - the flash LED is in flash mode - (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps - (mA) if possible.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY</constant></entry> - <entry>integer</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash LED in - torch mode (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be - milliamps (mA) if possible. Setting this control may not - be possible in presence of some faults. See - V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY</constant></entry> - <entry>integer</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the indicator LED. - The indicator LED may be fully independent of the flash - LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if possible.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT</constant></entry> - <entry>bitmask</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Faults related to the flash. The - faults tell about specific problems in the flash chip - itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may prevent - further use of some of the flash controls. In particular, - V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE - if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults - have such an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults - resets the control and returns the chip to a usable state - if possible.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2"> - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE</constant></entry> - <entry>Flash controller voltage to the flash LED - has exceeded the limit specific to the flash - controller.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT</constant></entry> - <entry>The flash strobe was still on when - the timeout set by the user --- - V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. - Not all flash controllers may set this in all - such conditions.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE</constant></entry> - <entry>The flash controller has overheated.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT</constant></entry> - <entry>The short circuit protection of the flash - controller has been triggered.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT</constant></entry> - <entry>Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit - specific to the flash controller.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR</constant></entry> - <entry>The flash controller has detected a short or open - circuit condition on the indicator LED.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </entrytbl> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE</constant></entry> - <entry>boolean</entry> - </row> - <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable or disable charging of the xenon - flash capacitor.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY</constant></entry> - <entry>boolean</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry spanname="descr">Is the flash ready to strobe? - Xenon flashes require their capacitors charged before - strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period - after strobe during which another strobe will not be - possible. This is a read-only control.</entry> - </row> - <row><entry></entry></row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> </section> <section id="jpeg-controls"> @@ -4268,6 +4533,177 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para> pixels / second. </entry> </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN</constant></entry> + <entry>menu</entry> + </row> + <row id="v4l2-test-pattern"> + <entry spanname="descr"> Some capture/display/sensor devices have + the capability to generate test pattern images. These hardware + specific test patterns can be used to test if a device is working + properly.</entry> + </row> + <row><entry></entry></row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + </section> + + <section id="dv-controls"> + <title>Digital Video Control Reference</title> + + <note> + <title>Experimental</title> + + <para>This is an <link + linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may + change in the future.</para> + </note> + + <para> + The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers + and transmitters for <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga">VGA</ulink>, + <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface">DVI</ulink> + (Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (<xref linkend="hdmi" />) and DisplayPort (<xref linkend="dp" />). + These controls are generally expected to be private to the receiver or transmitter + subdevice that implements them, so they are only exposed on the + <filename>/dev/v4l-subdev*</filename> device node. + </para> + + <para>Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are + hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will receive or + transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads can still be + active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display Identification Data, + <xref linkend="vesaedid" />) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content + Protection System, <xref linkend="hdcp" />) processing, allowing the device + to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows for quick + switching between connectors.</para> + + <para>These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as + bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad 1, + etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads.</para> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="dv-control-id"> + <title>Digital Video Control IDs</title> + + <tgroup cols="4"> + <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" /> + <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" /> + <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" /> + <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" /> + <spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" /> + <spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" /> + <thead> + <row> + <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry> + <entry align="left">Type</entry> + </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS</constant></entry> + <entry>class</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">The Digital Video class descriptor.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG</constant></entry> + <entry>bitmask</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high + if EDID information is available from the source. This control shows the + state of the hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter. + Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad + does not have an associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0. + This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE</constant></entry> + <entry>bitmask</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS + clock lines. This normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e. + the transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video). + Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad + does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for that pad will be 0. + This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D and HDMI devices. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT</constant></entry> + <entry>bitmask</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the + receiver it will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read + at least the first block (= 128 bytes). + Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad + does not support EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0. + This read-only control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE</constant></entry> + <entry id="v4l2-dv-tx-mode">enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video) + or in HDMI mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which mode + to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI. + This control is applicable to HDMI connectors. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE</constant></entry> + <entry id="v4l2-dv-rgb-range">enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO + follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the video interface + (ie. <xref linkend="cea861" /> for HDMI). V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the standard + to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the standard correctly + (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). Full range allows all possible values to be + used whereas limited range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) + where N is the number of bits per component. + This control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT</constant></entry> + <entry>bitmask</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source + (e.g. HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an eeprom + which contains EDID information, such that the source can read the EDID even if + the sink is in standby/power off. + Each bit corresponds to an input pad on the transmitter. If an input pad + cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad will be 0. + This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + </entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE</constant></entry> + <entry>enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO + follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the video interface + (ie. <xref linkend="cea861" /> for HDMI). V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the standard + to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the standard correctly + (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). Full range allows all possible values to be + used whereas limited range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) + where N is the number of bits per component. + This control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + </entry> + </row> <row><entry></entry></row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml index 479d943..dd91d61 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml @@ -1,13 +1,6 @@ <title>Video Output Overlay Interface</title> <subtitle>Also known as On-Screen Display (OSD)</subtitle> - <note> - <title>Experimental</title> - - <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> -interface and may change in the future.</para> - </note> - <para>Some video output devices can overlay a framebuffer image onto the outgoing video signal. Applications can set up such an overlay using this interface, which borrows structures and ioctls of the <link diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml index 38883a4..be2f337 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ information, on an inaudible audio subcarrier of a radio program. This interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and/or transmitting RDS information.</para> - <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="en50067" /> + <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="iec62106" /> and the RBDS standard <xref linkend="nrsc4" />.</para> <para>Note that the RBDS standard as is used in the USA is almost identical diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index a3d9dd0..d15aaf8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -374,29 +374,29 @@ rectangle --- if it is supported by the hardware.</para> <orderedlist> - <listitem>Sink pad format. The user configures the sink pad + <listitem><para>Sink pad format. The user configures the sink pad format. This format defines the parameters of the image the - entity receives through the pad for further processing.</listitem> + entity receives through the pad for further processing.</para></listitem> - <listitem>Sink pad actual crop selection. The sink pad crop - defines the crop performed to the sink pad format.</listitem> + <listitem><para>Sink pad actual crop selection. The sink pad crop + defines the crop performed to the sink pad format.</para></listitem> - <listitem>Sink pad actual compose selection. The size of the + <listitem><para>Sink pad actual compose selection. The size of the sink pad compose rectangle defines the scaling ratio compared to the size of the sink pad crop rectangle. The location of the compose rectangle specifies the location of the actual sink compose rectangle in the sink compose bounds - rectangle.</listitem> + rectangle.</para></listitem> - <listitem>Source pad actual crop selection. Crop on the source + <listitem><para>Source pad actual crop selection. Crop on the source pad defines crop performed to the image in the sink compose - bounds rectangle.</listitem> + bounds rectangle.</para></listitem> - <listitem>Source pad format. The source pad format defines the + <listitem><para>Source pad format. The source pad format defines the output pixel format of the subdev, as well as the other parameters with the exception of the image width and height. Width and height are defined by the size of the source pad - actual crop selection.</listitem> + actual crop selection.</para></listitem> </orderedlist> <para>Accessing any of the above rectangles not supported by the diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml index 5bbf3ce..7e29a4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml @@ -7,6 +7,15 @@ <tbody valign="top"> <!-- Keep it ordered alphabetically --> <row> + <entry>EAGAIN (aka EWOULDBLOCK)</entry> + <entry>The ioctl can't be handled because the device is in state where + it can't perform it. This could happen for example in case where + device is sleeping and ioctl is performed to query statistics. + It is also returned when the ioctl would need to wait + for an event, but the device was opened in non-blocking mode. + </entry> + </row> + <row> <entry>EBADF</entry> <entry>The file descriptor is not a valid.</entry> </row> @@ -51,21 +60,11 @@ for periodic transfers (up to 80% of the USB bandwidth).</entry> </row> <row> - <entry>ENOSYS or EOPNOTSUPP</entry> - <entry>Function not available for this device (dvb API only. Will likely - be replaced anytime soon by ENOTTY).</entry> - </row> - <row> <entry>EPERM</entry> <entry>Permission denied. Can be returned if the device needs write permission, or some special capabilities is needed (e. g. root)</entry> </row> - <row> - <entry>EWOULDBLOCK</entry> - <entry>Operation would block. Used when the ioctl would need to wait - for an event, but the device was opened in non-blocking mode.</entry> - </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml index 1885cc0..b5d1cbd 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml @@ -613,8 +613,8 @@ field is independent of the <structfield>timestamp</structfield> and <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>sequence</structfield></entry> <entry></entry> - <entry>Set by the driver, counting the frames in the -sequence.</entry> + <entry>Set by the driver, counting the frames (not fields!) in +sequence. This field is set for both input and output devices.</entry> </row> <row> <entry spanname="hspan"><para>In <link @@ -677,26 +677,24 @@ memory, set by the application. See <xref linkend="userp" /> for details. <entry><structfield>length</structfield></entry> <entry></entry> <entry>Size of the buffer (not the payload) in bytes for the - single-planar API. For the multi-planar API should contain the - number of elements in the <structfield>planes</structfield> array. + single-planar API. For the multi-planar API the application sets + this to the number of elements in the <structfield>planes</structfield> + array. The driver will fill in the actual number of valid elements in + that array. </entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>reserved2</structfield></entry> <entry></entry> - <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom -(driver defined) buffer types -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and higher. Applications + <entry>A place holder for future extensions. Applications should set this to 0.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield></entry> <entry></entry> - <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom -(driver defined) buffer types -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and higher. Applications + <entry>A place holder for future extensions. Applications should set this to 0.</entry> </row> </tbody> @@ -827,14 +825,7 @@ should set this to 0.</entry> <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant></entry> <entry>8</entry> <entry>Buffer for video output overlay (OSD), see <xref - linkend="osd" />. Status: <link -linkend="experimental">Experimental</link>.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant></entry> - <entry>0x80</entry> - <entry>This and higher values are reserved for custom -(driver defined) buffer types.</entry> + linkend="osd" />.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml index 5274c24..a990b34 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml @@ -1,11 +1,13 @@ - <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12M"> + <refentry> <refmeta> - <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M ('NM12')</refentrytitle> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M ('NM12'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M ('NM21'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</refentrytitle> &manvol; </refmeta> <refnamediv> - <refname> <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant></refname> - <refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12</constant> with planes + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV21M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12MT_16X16"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12</constant> and <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21</constant> with planes non contiguous in memory. </refpurpose> </refnamediv> <refsect1> @@ -22,7 +24,12 @@ The CbCr plane is the same width, in bytes, as the Y plane (and of the image), but is half as tall in pixels. Each CbCr pair belongs to four pixels. For example, Cb<subscript>0</subscript>/Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to Y'<subscript>00</subscript>, Y'<subscript>01</subscript>, -Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>. </para> +Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>. +<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</constant> is the tiled version of +<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> with 16x16 macroblock tiles. Here pixels +are arranged in 16x16 2D tiles and tiles are arranged in linear order in memory. +<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M</constant> is the same as <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> +except the Cb and Cr bytes are swapped, the CrCb plane starts with a Cr byte.</para> <para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> is intended to be used only in drivers and applications that support the multi-planar API, diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml index 8eace3e..2d3f0b1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml @@ -22,8 +22,7 @@ with 10 bits per colour compressed to 8 bits each, using DPCM compression. DPCM, differential pulse-code modulation, is lossy. Each colour component consumes 8 bits of memory. In other respects - this format is similar to <xref - linkend="pixfmt-srggb10">.</xref></para> + this format is similar to <xref linkend="pixfmt-srggb10" />.</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2330667 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ + <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YVU420M"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M ('YM21')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname> <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420</constant> + with planes non contiguous in memory. </refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a multi-planar format, as opposed to a packed format. +The three components are separated into three sub-images or planes. + +The Y plane is first. The Y plane has one byte per pixel. The Cr data +constitutes the second plane which is half the width and half +the height of the Y plane (and of the image). Each Cr belongs to four +pixels, a two-by-two square of the image. For example, +Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to Y'<subscript>00</subscript>, +Y'<subscript>01</subscript>, Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, and +Y'<subscript>11</subscript>. The Cb data, just like the Cr plane, constitutes +the third plane. </para> + + <para>If the Y plane has pad bytes after each row, then the Cr +and Cb planes have half as many pad bytes after their rows. In other +words, two Cx rows (including padding) is exactly as long as one Y row +(including padding).</para> + + <para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant> is intended to be +used only in drivers and applications that support the multi-planar API, +described in <xref linkend="planar-apis"/>. </para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start0 + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start0 + 4:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start0 + 8:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start0 + 12:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry>start1 + 0:</entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start1 + 2:</entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row><entry></entry></row> + <row> + <entry>start2 + 0:</entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start2 + 2:</entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Color Sample Location.</title> + <para> + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="7" align="center"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry>0</entry><entry></entry><entry>1</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>2</entry><entry></entry><entry>3</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>0</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>1</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>2</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>3</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> + </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml index e58934c..bf94f41 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -708,6 +708,7 @@ information.</para> &sub-y41p; &sub-yuv420; &sub-yuv420m; + &sub-yvu420m; &sub-yuv410; &sub-yuv422p; &sub-yuv411p; @@ -757,6 +758,11 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see <entry>'AVC1'</entry> <entry>H264 video elementary stream without start codes.</entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H264-MVC"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_H264_MVC</constant></entry> + <entry>'MVC'</entry> + <entry>H264 MVC video elementary stream.</entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H263"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_H263</constant></entry> <entry>'H263'</entry> @@ -792,6 +798,11 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see <entry>'VC1L'</entry> <entry>VC1, SMPTE 421M Annex L compliant stream.</entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-VP8"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_VP8</constant></entry> + <entry>'VP8'</entry> + <entry>VP8 video elementary stream.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> @@ -995,6 +1006,34 @@ the other bits are set to 0.</entry> <entry>Old 6-bit greyscale format. Only the most significant 6 bits of each byte are used, the other bits are set to 0.</entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPG"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPG</constant></entry> + <entry>'S5CI'</entry> + <entry>Two-planar format used by Samsung S5C73MX cameras. The +first plane contains interleaved JPEG and UYVY image data, followed by meta data +in form of an array of offsets to the UYVY data blocks. The actual pointer array +follows immediately the interleaved JPEG/UYVY data, the number of entries in +this array equals the height of the UYVY image. Each entry is a 4-byte unsigned +integer in big endian order and it's an offset to a single pixel line of the +UYVY image. The first plane can start either with JPEG or UYVY data chunk. The +size of a single UYVY block equals the UYVY image's width multiplied by 2. The +size of a JPEG chunk depends on the image and can vary with each line. +<para>The second plane, at an offset of 4084 bytes, contains a 4-byte offset to +the pointer array in the first plane. This offset is followed by a 4-byte value +indicating size of the pointer array. All numbers in the second plane are also +in big endian order. Remaining data in the second plane is undefined. The +information in the second plane allows to easily find location of the pointer +array, which can be different for each frame. The size of the pointer array is +constant for given UYVY image height.</para> +<para>In order to extract UYVY and JPEG frames an application can initially set +a data pointer to the start of first plane and then add an offset from the first +entry of the pointers table. Such a pointer indicates start of an UYVY image +pixel line. Whole UYVY line can be copied to a separate buffer. These steps +should be repeated for each line, i.e. the number of entries in the pointer +array. Anything what's in between the UYVY lines is JPEG data and should be +concatenated to form the JPEG stream. </para> +</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml index e7ed507..4c238ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml @@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ cropping and composing rectangles have the same size.</para> <section> <title>Selection targets</title> + <para> <figure id="sel-targets-capture"> <title>Cropping and composing targets</title> <mediaobject> @@ -52,12 +53,12 @@ cropping and composing rectangles have the same size.</para> </textobject> </mediaobject> </figure> + </para> + <para>See <xref linkend="v4l2-selection-targets" /> for more + information.</para> </section> - See <xref linkend="v4l2-selection-targets" /> for more - information. - <section> <title>Configuration</title> @@ -216,18 +217,17 @@ composing and cropping operations by setting the appropriate targets. The V4L2 API lacks any support for composing to and cropping from an image inside a memory buffer. The application could configure a capture device to fill only a part of an image by abusing V4L2 API. Cropping a smaller image from a larger -one is achieved by setting the field <structfield> -&v4l2-pix-format;::bytesperline </structfield>. Introducing an image offsets -could be done by modifying field <structfield> &v4l2-buffer;::m:userptr -</structfield> before calling <constant> VIDIOC_QBUF </constant>. Those +one is achieved by setting the field +&v4l2-pix-format;<structfield>::bytesperline</structfield>. Introducing an image offsets +could be done by modifying field &v4l2-buffer;<structfield>::m_userptr</structfield> +before calling <constant> VIDIOC_QBUF </constant>. Those operations should be avoided because they are not portable (endianness), and do not work for macroblock and Bayer formats and mmap buffers. The selection API deals with configuration of buffer cropping/composing in a clear, intuitive and portable way. Next, with the selection API the concepts of the padded target -and constraints flags are introduced. Finally, <structname> &v4l2-crop; -</structname> and <structname> &v4l2-cropcap; </structname> have no reserved -fields. Therefore there is no way to extend their functionality. The new -<structname> &v4l2-selection; </structname> provides a lot of place for future +and constraints flags are introduced. Finally, &v4l2-crop; and &v4l2-cropcap; +have no reserved fields. Therefore there is no way to extend their functionality. +The new &v4l2-selection; provides a lot of place for future extensions. Driver developers are encouraged to implement only selection API. The former cropping API would be simulated using the new one. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml index 49c532e..a0a9364 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml @@ -2565,5 +2565,49 @@ </tgroup> </table> </section> + + <section id="v4l2-mbus-vendor-spec-fmts"> + <title>Vendor and Device Specific Formats</title> + + <note> + <title>Experimental</title> + <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> +interface and may change in the future.</para> + </note> + + <para>This section lists complex data formats that are either vendor or + device specific. + </para> + + <para>The following table lists the existing vendor and device specific + formats.</para> + + <table pgwide="0" frame="none" id="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-vendor-specific"> + <title>Vendor and device specific formats</title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + <colspec colname="id" align="left" /> + <colspec colname="code" align="left"/> + <colspec colname="remarks" align="left"/> + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Identifier</entry> + <entry>Code</entry> + <entry>Comments</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPEG-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPEG_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x5001</entry> + <entry> + Interleaved raw UYVY and JPEG image format with embedded + meta-data used by Samsung S3C73MX camera sensors. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </section> + </section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml index eee6908..10ccde9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -145,9 +145,12 @@ applications. --> <authorinitials>hv</authorinitials> <revremark>Added VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS. </revremark> + </revision> + + <revision> <revnumber>3.5</revnumber> <date>2012-05-07</date> - <authorinitials>sa, sn</authorinitials> + <authorinitials>sa, sn, hv</authorinitials> <revremark>Added V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER_MENU and V4L2 subdev selections API. Improved the description of V4L2_CID_COLORFX control, added V4L2_CID_COLORFX_CBCR control. @@ -158,11 +161,8 @@ applications. --> V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK, V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START, V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP, V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS and V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE. - </revremark> - <date>2012-05-01</date> - <authorinitials>hv</authorinitials> - <revremark>Added VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS, VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS and - VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP. + Added VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS, VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS and + VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP. </revremark> </revision> @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark> </partinfo> <title>Video for Linux Two API Specification</title> - <subtitle>Revision 3.5</subtitle> + <subtitle>Revision 3.6</subtitle> <chapter id="common"> &sub-common; @@ -581,6 +581,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark> &sub-subdev-enum-frame-size; &sub-subdev-enum-mbus-code; &sub-subdev-g-crop; + &sub-subdev-g-edid; &sub-subdev-g-fmt; &sub-subdev-g-frame-interval; &sub-subdev-g-selection; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml index f1bac2c..bf7cc97 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml @@ -59,6 +59,9 @@ constant except when switching the video standard. Remember this switch can occur implicit when switching the video input or output.</para> + <para>This ioctl must be implemented for video capture or output devices that +support cropping and/or scaling and/or have non-square pixels, and for overlay devices.</para> + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-cropcap"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_cropcap</structname></title> <tgroup cols="3"> @@ -70,10 +73,10 @@ output.</para> <entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application. Only these types are valid here: <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>, +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>, <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>, -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver -defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> -and higher. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant> and +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>struct <link linkend="v4l2-rect-crop">v4l2_rect</link></entry> @@ -156,8 +159,7 @@ on 22 Oct 2002 subject "Re:[V4L][patches!] Re:v4l2/kernel-2.5" --> <term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The &v4l2-cropcap; <structfield>type</structfield> is -invalid. This is not permitted for video capture, output and overlay devices, -which must support <constant>VIDIOC_CROPCAP</constant>.</para> +invalid.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml index 74b87f6..9215627 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml @@ -49,13 +49,6 @@ <refsect1> <title>Description</title> - <note> - <title>Experimental</title> - - <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> -interface and may change in the future.</para> - </note> - <para>These ioctls control an audio/video (usually MPEG-) decoder. <constant>VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD</constant> sends a command to the decoder, <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</constant> can be used to diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml index f431b3b..0619ca5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml @@ -49,13 +49,6 @@ <refsect1> <title>Description</title> - <note> - <title>Experimental</title> - - <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> -interface and may change in the future.</para> - </note> - <para>These ioctls control an audio/video (usually MPEG-) encoder. <constant>VIDIOC_ENCODER_CMD</constant> sends a command to the encoder, <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD</constant> can be used to diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml index 509f001..fced5fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml @@ -229,6 +229,12 @@ intended for the user.</entry> is out of bounds.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video presets are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml index 24c3bf4..b3e17c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml @@ -106,6 +106,12 @@ application.</entry> is out of bounds.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video presets are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml index 81ebe48..f8dfeed 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml @@ -58,6 +58,9 @@ structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return an incrementing by one until <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode> is returned.</para> + <para>Note that after switching input or output the list of enumerated image +formats may be different.</para> + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-fmtdesc"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_fmtdesc</structname></title> <tgroup cols="3"> @@ -78,10 +81,8 @@ Only these types are valid here: <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>, <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>, <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>, -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant>, -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver -defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> -and higher. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant> and +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml index f77a13f..a78454b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml @@ -50,13 +50,6 @@ and pixel format and receives a frame width and height.</para> <refsect1> <title>Description</title> - <note> - <title>Experimental</title> - - <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> -interface and may change in the future.</para> - </note> - <para>This ioctl allows applications to enumerate all frame sizes (&ie; width and height in pixels) that the device supports for the given pixel format.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml index 46d5a04..3c9a813 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009. <entry>This input supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry> </row> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant></entry> <entry>0x00000002</entry> <entry>This input supports setting video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml index 4280200..f4ab079 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009. <entry>This output supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry> </row> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant></entry> <entry>0x00000002</entry> <entry>This output supports setting video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml index 3a5fc54..8065099 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml @@ -378,6 +378,12 @@ system)</para></footnote></para></entry> is out of bounds.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml index c4ff3b1..75c6a93 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml @@ -104,10 +104,8 @@ changed and <constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant> returns the <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry> <entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application. Only these types are valid here: <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>, -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>, -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver -defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> -and higher. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> and +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>&v4l2-rect;</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml index 61be9fa..b9ea376 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml @@ -78,6 +78,12 @@ If the preset is not supported, it returns an &EINVAL; </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video presets are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The device is busy and therefore can not change the preset.</para> @@ -104,7 +110,4 @@ If the preset is not supported, it returns an &EINVAL; </para> </tgroup> </table> </refsect1> - <refsect1> - &return-value; - </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml index eda1a29..7236970 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml @@ -56,7 +56,9 @@ a pointer to the &v4l2-dv-timings; structure as argument. If the ioctl is not su or the timing values are not correct, the driver returns &EINVAL;.</para> <para>The <filename>linux/v4l2-dv-timings.h</filename> header can be used to get the timings of the formats in the <xref linkend="cea861" /> and <xref linkend="vesadmt" /> -standards.</para> +standards. If the current input or output does not support DV timings (e.g. if +&VIDIOC-ENUMINPUT; does not set the <constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant> flag), then +&ENODATA; is returned.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -71,6 +73,12 @@ standards.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The device is busy and therefore can not change the timings.</para> @@ -320,7 +328,4 @@ detected or used depends on the hardware. </tgroup> </table> </refsect1> - <refsect1> - &return-value; - </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml index 2aef02c..be25029 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml @@ -48,13 +48,6 @@ <refsect1> <title>Description</title> - <note> - <title>Experimental</title> - - <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link> -interface and may change in the future.</para> - </note> - <para>The <constant>VIDIOC_G_ENC_INDEX</constant> ioctl provides meta data about a compressed video stream the same or another application currently reads from the driver, which is useful for diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml index 52acff1..ee8f56e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ the application calls the <constant>VIDIOC_S_FMT</constant> ioctl with a pointer to a <structname>v4l2_format</structname> structure the driver checks and adjusts the parameters against hardware abilities. Drivers -should not return an error code unless the input is ambiguous, this is +should not return an error code unless the <structfield>type</structfield> field is invalid, this is a mechanism to fathom device capabilities and to approach parameters acceptable for both the application and driver. On success the driver may program the hardware, allocate resources and generally prepare for @@ -107,6 +107,10 @@ disabling I/O or possibly time consuming hardware preparations. Although strongly recommended drivers are not required to implement this ioctl.</para> + <para>The format as returned by <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant> +must be identical to what <constant>VIDIOC_S_FMT</constant> returns for +the same input or output.</para> + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-format"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_format</structname></title> <tgroup cols="4"> @@ -170,9 +174,7 @@ capture and output devices.</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>__u8</entry> <entry><structfield>raw_data</structfield>[200]</entry> - <entry>Place holder for future extensions and custom -(driver defined) formats with <structfield>type</structfield> -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and higher.</entry> + <entry>Place holder for future extensions.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> @@ -187,8 +189,7 @@ capture and output devices.</entry> <term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The &v4l2-format; <structfield>type</structfield> -field is invalid, the requested buffer type not supported, or the -format is not supported with this buffer type.</para> +field is invalid or the requested buffer type not supported.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml index f83d2cd..9058224 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml @@ -108,9 +108,7 @@ devices.</para> <entry></entry> <entry>__u8</entry> <entry><structfield>raw_data</structfield>[200]</entry> - <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom -(driver defined) buffer types <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and -higher.</entry> + <entry>A place holder for future extensions.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml index f76d8a6..b11ec75 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml @@ -152,12 +152,10 @@ satisfactory parameters have been negotiated. If constraints flags have to be violated at then ERANGE is returned. The error indicates that <emphasis> there exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para> - </refsect1> - <para>Selection targets and flags are documented in <xref linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</para> - <section> + <para> <figure id="sel-const-adjust"> <title>Size adjustments with constraint flags.</title> <mediaobject> @@ -170,9 +168,9 @@ exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para> </textobject> </mediaobject> </figure> - </section> + </para> - <refsect1> + <para> <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-selection"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_selection</structname></title> <tgroup cols="3"> @@ -208,6 +206,7 @@ exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml index 99ff1a0..4a89841 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml @@ -72,7 +72,9 @@ flags, being a write-only ioctl it does not return the actual new standard as the current input does not support the requested standard the driver returns an &EINVAL;. When the standard set is ambiguous drivers may return <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode> or choose any of the requested -standards.</para> +standards. If the current input or output does not support standard video timings (e.g. if +&VIDIOC-ENUMINPUT; does not set the <constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_STD</constant> flag), then +&ENODATA; is returned.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -85,6 +87,12 @@ standards.</para> <para>The <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant> parameter was unsuitable.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml index 701138f..6cc8201 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml @@ -354,6 +354,12 @@ radio tuners.</entry> <entry>The &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS; ioctl can be used to enumerate the available frequency bands.</entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_PROG_LIM</constant></entry> + <entry>0x0800</entry> + <entry>The range to search when using the hardware seek functionality + is programmable, see &VIDIOC-S-HW-FREQ-SEEK; for details.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml index 77ff5be..2d37abe 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml @@ -121,8 +121,7 @@ remaining fields or returns an error code. The driver may also set field. It indicates a non-critical (recoverable) streaming error. In such case the application may continue as normal, but should be aware that data in the dequeued buffer might be corrupted. When using the multi-planar API, the -planes array does not have to be passed; the <structfield>m.planes</structfield> -member must be set to NULL in that case.</para> +planes array must be passed in as well.</para> <para>By default <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no buffer is in the outgoing queue. When the @@ -155,6 +154,8 @@ or no buffers have been allocated yet, or the <structfield>userptr</structfield> or <structfield>length</structfield> are invalid.</para> </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term><errorcode>EIO</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> failed due to an diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml index 1bc8aeb..68b49d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml @@ -65,5 +65,14 @@ returned.</para> <refsect1> &return-value; + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video presets are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml index 44935a0..e185f14 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml @@ -78,6 +78,12 @@ capabilities in order to give more precise feedback to the user. <variablelist> <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Digital video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term><errorcode>ENOLINK</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>No timings could be detected because no signal was found. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml index 6e414d7..a597155 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml @@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>Description</title> - <para>This ioctl is part of the <link linkend="mmap">memory -mapping</link> I/O method. It can be used to query the status of a + <para>This ioctl is part of the <link linkend="mmap">streaming +</link> I/O method. It can be used to query the status of a buffer at any time after buffers have been allocated with the &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl.</para> @@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ the structure.</para> <para>In the <structfield>flags</structfield> field the <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_MAPPED</constant>, +<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PREPARED</constant>, <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_QUEUED</constant> and <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_DONE</constant> flags will be valid. The <structfield>memory</structfield> field will be set to the current @@ -79,8 +80,10 @@ contains the offset of the buffer from the start of the device memory, the <structfield>length</structfield> field its size. For the multi-planar API, fields <structfield>m.mem_offset</structfield> and <structfield>length</structfield> in the <structfield>m.planes</structfield> -array elements will be used instead. The driver may or may not set the remaining -fields and flags, they are meaningless in this context.</para> +array elements will be used instead and the <structfield>length</structfield> +field of &v4l2-buffer; is set to the number of filled-in array elements. +The driver may or may not set the remaining fields and flags, they are +meaningless in this context.</para> <para>The <structname>v4l2_buffer</structname> structure is specified in <xref linkend="buffer" />.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml index f33dd74..4c70215 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml @@ -90,11 +90,13 @@ ambiguities.</entry> <entry>__u8</entry> <entry><structfield>bus_info</structfield>[32]</entry> <entry>Location of the device in the system, a -NUL-terminated ASCII string. For example: "PCI Slot 4". This +NUL-terminated ASCII string. For example: "PCI:0000:05:06.0". This information is intended for users, to distinguish multiple -identical devices. If no such information is available the field may -simply count the devices controlled by the driver, or contain the -empty string (<structfield>bus_info</structfield>[0] = 0).<!-- XXX pci_dev->slot_name example --></entry> +identical devices. If no such information is available the field must +simply count the devices controlled by the driver ("platform:vivi-000"). +The bus_info must start with "PCI:" for PCI boards, "PCIe:" for PCI Express boards, +"usb-" for USB devices, "I2C:" for i2c devices, "ISA:" for ISA devices, +"parport" for parallel port devices and "platform:" for platform devices.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml index 4b79c7c..fe80a18 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml @@ -62,5 +62,13 @@ current video input or output.</para> <refsect1> &return-value; + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml index d7c9505..2b50ef2 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml @@ -109,9 +109,8 @@ as the &v4l2-format; <structfield>type</structfield> field. See <xref <row> <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[2]</entry> - <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom -(driver defined) buffer types <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and -higher. This array should be zeroed by applications.</entry> + <entry>A place holder for future extensions. This array should +be zeroed by applications.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml index 3dd1bec..5b379e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml @@ -75,6 +75,9 @@ seek is started.</para> <para>This ioctl is supported if the <constant>V4L2_CAP_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> capability is set.</para> + <para>If this ioctl is called from a non-blocking filehandle, then &EAGAIN; is + returned and no seek takes place.</para> + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-hw-freq-seek"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_hw_freq_seek</structname></title> <tgroup cols="3"> @@ -158,6 +161,13 @@ fields is wrong.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>EAGAIN</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>Attempted to call <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> + with the filehandle in non-blocking mode.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The hardware seek found no channels.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml index 81cca45..716ea15 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml @@ -74,7 +74,12 @@ not transmitted yet. I/O returns to the same state as after calling stream type. This is the same as &v4l2-requestbuffers; <structfield>type</structfield>.</para> - <para>Note applications can be preempted for unknown periods right + <para>If <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant> is called when streaming +is already in progress, or if <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> is called +when streaming is already stopped, then the ioctl does nothing and 0 is +returned.</para> + + <para>Note that applications can be preempted for unknown periods right before or after the <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant> or <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> calls, there is no notion of starting or stopping "now". Buffer timestamps can be used to diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bbd18f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +<refentry id="vidioc-subdev-g-edid"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + + <refnamediv> + <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID</refname> + <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</refname> + <refpurpose>Get or set the EDID of a video receiver/transmitter</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + + <refsynopsisdiv> + <funcsynopsis> + <funcprototype> + <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> + <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_subdev_edid *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + </funcprototype> + </funcsynopsis> + <funcsynopsis> + <funcprototype> + <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> + <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>const struct v4l2_subdev_edid *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + </funcprototype> + </funcsynopsis> + </refsynopsisdiv> + + <refsect1> + <title>Arguments</title> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term><parameter>fd</parameter></term> + <listitem> + <para>&fd;</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> + <listitem> + <para>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><parameter>argp</parameter></term> + <listitem> + <para></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </refsect1> + + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + <para>These ioctls can be used to get or set an EDID associated with an input pad + from a receiver or an output pad of a transmitter subdevice.</para> + + <para>To get the EDID data the application has to fill in the <structfield>pad</structfield>, + <structfield>start_block</structfield>, <structfield>blocks</structfield> and <structfield>edid</structfield> + fields and call <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID</constant>. The current EDID from block + <structfield>start_block</structfield> and of size <structfield>blocks</structfield> + will be placed in the memory <structfield>edid</structfield> points to. The <structfield>edid</structfield> + pointer must point to memory at least <structfield>blocks</structfield> * 128 bytes + large (the size of one block is 128 bytes).</para> + + <para>If there are fewer blocks than specified, then the driver will set <structfield>blocks</structfield> + to the actual number of blocks. If there are no EDID blocks available at all, then the error code + ENODATA is set.</para> + + <para>If blocks have to be retrieved from the sink, then this call will block until they + have been read.</para> + + <para>To set the EDID blocks of a receiver the application has to fill in the <structfield>pad</structfield>, + <structfield>blocks</structfield> and <structfield>edid</structfield> fields and set + <structfield>start_block</structfield> to 0. It is not possible to set part of an EDID, + it is always all or nothing. Setting the EDID data is only valid for receivers as it makes + no sense for a transmitter.</para> + + <para>The driver assumes that the full EDID is passed in. If there are more EDID blocks than + the hardware can handle then the EDID is not written, but instead the error code E2BIG is set + and <structfield>blocks</structfield> is set to the maximum that the hardware supports. + If <structfield>start_block</structfield> is any + value other than 0 then the error code EINVAL is set.</para> + + <para>To disable an EDID you set <structfield>blocks</structfield> to 0. Depending on the + hardware this will drive the hotplug pin low and/or block the source from reading the EDID + data in some way. In any case, the end result is the same: the EDID is no longer available. + </para> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-subdev-edid"> + <title>struct <structname>v4l2_subdev_edid</structname></title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + &cs-str; + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>pad</structfield></entry> + <entry>Pad for which to get/set the EDID blocks.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>start_block</structfield></entry> + <entry>Read the EDID from starting with this block. Must be 0 when setting + the EDID.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>blocks</structfield></entry> + <entry>The number of blocks to get or set. Must be less or equal to 256 (the + maximum number of blocks as defined by the standard). When you set the EDID and + <structfield>blocks</structfield> is 0, then the EDID is disabled or erased.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u8 *</entry> + <entry><structfield>edid</structfield></entry> + <entry>Pointer to memory that contains the EDID. The minimum size is + <structfield>blocks</structfield> * 128.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[5]</entry> + <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must + set the array to zero.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </refsect1> + + <refsect1> + &return-value; + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>The EDID data is not available.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term><errorcode>E2BIG</errorcode></term> + <listitem> + <para>The EDID data you provided is more than the hardware can handle.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml index f33cc81..1ba9e99 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml @@ -69,23 +69,22 @@ more information on how each selection target affects the image processing pipeline inside the subdevice.</para> - <section> + <refsect2> <title>Types of selection targets</title> <para>There are two types of selection targets: actual and bounds. The actual targets are the targets which configure the hardware. The BOUNDS target will return a rectangle that contain all possible actual rectangles.</para> - </section> + </refsect2> - <section> + <refsect2> <title>Discovering supported features</title> <para>To discover which targets are supported, the user can perform <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION</constant> on them. Any unsupported target will return <constant>EINVAL</constant>.</para> - </section> <para>Selection targets and flags are documented in <xref linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</para> @@ -132,6 +131,7 @@ </tbody> </tgroup> </table> + </refsect2> </refsect1> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl index 4e8e898..f2413ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ <title>LINUX MEDIA INFRASTRUCTURE API</title> <copyright> - <year>2009-2011</year> + <year>2009-2012</year> <holder>LinuxTV Developers</holder> </copyright> @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled video and radio straming devices, including video cameras, analog and digital TV receiver cards, AM/FM receiver cards, streaming capture devices.</para> - <para>It is divided into three parts.</para> + <para>It is divided into four parts.</para> <para>The first part covers radio, capture, cameras and analog TV devices.</para> <para>The second part covers the @@ -62,7 +62,8 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled in fact it covers several different video standards including DVB-T, DVB-S, DVB-C and ATSC. The API is currently being updated to documment support also for DVB-S2, ISDB-T and ISDB-S.</para> - <para>The third part covers Remote Controller API</para> + <para>The third part covers the Remote Controller API.</para> + <para>The fourth part covers the Media Controller API.</para> <para>For additional information and for the latest development code, see: <ulink url="http://linuxtv.org">http://linuxtv.org</ulink>.</para> <para>For discussing improvements, reporting troubles, sending new drivers, etc, please mail to: <ulink url="http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-media">Linux Media Mailing List (LMML).</ulink>.</para> @@ -87,7 +88,7 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled </author> </authorgroup> <copyright> - <year>2009-2011</year> + <year>2009-2012</year> <holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index e0aedb7..fe122d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -1216,8 +1216,6 @@ in this page</entry> #define NAND_BBT_LASTBLOCK 0x00000010 /* The bbt is at the given page, else we must scan for the bbt */ #define NAND_BBT_ABSPAGE 0x00000020 -/* The bbt is at the given page, else we must scan for the bbt */ -#define NAND_BBT_SEARCH 0x00000040 /* bbt is stored per chip on multichip devices */ #define NAND_BBT_PERCHIP 0x00000080 /* bbt has a version counter at offset veroffs */ diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt index 5f5aa16..bfc9cb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt +++ b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt @@ -1,8 +1,16 @@ -The EtherDrive (R) HOWTO for users of 2.6 kernels is found at ... +ATA over Ethernet is a network protocol that provides simple access to +block storage on the LAN. - http://www.coraid.com/SUPPORT/EtherDrive-HBA + http://support.coraid.com/documents/AoEr11.txt - It has many tips and hints! +The EtherDrive (R) HOWTO for 2.6 and 3.x kernels is found at ... + + http://support.coraid.com/support/linux/EtherDrive-2.6-HOWTO.html + +It has many tips and hints! Please see, especially, recommended +tunings for virtual memory: + + http://support.coraid.com/support/linux/EtherDrive-2.6-HOWTO-5.html#ss5.19 The aoetools are userland programs that are designed to work with this driver. The aoetools are on sourceforge. @@ -23,20 +31,12 @@ CREATING DEVICE NODES There is a udev-install.sh script that shows how to install these rules on your system. - If you are not using udev, two scripts are provided in - Documentation/aoe as examples of static device node creation for - using the aoe driver. - - rm -rf /dev/etherd - sh Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh /dev/etherd - - ... or to make just one shelf's worth of block device nodes ... - - sh Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh /dev/etherd 0 - There is also an autoload script that shows how to edit /etc/modprobe.d/aoe.conf to ensure that the aoe module is loaded when - necessary. + necessary. Preloading the aoe module is preferable to autoloading, + however, because AoE discovery takes a few seconds. It can be + confusing when an AoE device is not present the first time the a + command is run but appears a second later. USING DEVICE NODES @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ USING DEVICE NODES "echo > /dev/etherd/discover" tells the driver to find out what AoE devices are available. - These character devices may disappear and be replaced by sysfs - counterparts. Using the commands in aoetools insulates users from - these implementation details. + In the future these character devices may disappear and be replaced + by sysfs counterparts. Using the commands in aoetools insulates + users from these implementation details. The block devices are named like this: @@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ USING SYSFS The netif attribute is the network interface on the localhost through which we are communicating with the remote AoE device. - There is a script in this directory that formats this information - in a convenient way. Users with aoetools can use the aoe-stat + There is a script in this directory that formats this information in + a convenient way. Users with aoetools should use the aoe-stat command. root@makki root# sh Documentation/aoe/status.sh @@ -121,3 +121,21 @@ DRIVER OPTIONS usage example for the module parameter. modprobe aoe_iflist="eth1 eth3" + + The aoe_deadsecs module parameter determines the maximum number of + seconds that the driver will wait for an AoE device to provide a + response to an AoE command. After aoe_deadsecs seconds have + elapsed, the AoE device will be marked as "down". + + The aoe_maxout module parameter has a default of 128. This is the + maximum number of unresponded packets that will be sent to an AoE + target at one time. + + The aoe_dyndevs module parameter defaults to 1, meaning that the + driver will assign a block device minor number to a discovered AoE + target based on the order of its discovery. With dynamic minor + device numbers in use, a greater range of AoE shelf and slot + addresses can be supported. Users with udev will never have to + think about minor numbers. Using aoe_dyndevs=0 allows device nodes + to be pre-created using a static minor-number scheme with the + aoe-mkshelf script in the aoetools. diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh b/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh deleted file mode 100644 index 44c0ab7..0000000 --- a/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh - -n_shelves=${n_shelves:-10} -n_partitions=${n_partitions:-16} - -if test "$#" != "1"; then - echo "Usage: sh `basename $0` {dir}" 1>&2 - echo " n_partitions=16 sh `basename $0` {dir}" 1>&2 - exit 1 -fi -dir=$1 - -MAJOR=152 - -echo "Creating AoE devnode files in $dir ..." - -set -e - -mkdir -p $dir - -# (Status info is in sysfs. See status.sh.) -# rm -f $dir/stat -# mknod -m 0400 $dir/stat c $MAJOR 1 -rm -f $dir/err -mknod -m 0400 $dir/err c $MAJOR 2 -rm -f $dir/discover -mknod -m 0200 $dir/discover c $MAJOR 3 -rm -f $dir/interfaces -mknod -m 0200 $dir/interfaces c $MAJOR 4 -rm -f $dir/revalidate -mknod -m 0200 $dir/revalidate c $MAJOR 5 -rm -f $dir/flush -mknod -m 0200 $dir/flush c $MAJOR 6 - -export n_partitions -mkshelf=`echo $0 | sed 's!mkdevs!mkshelf!'` -i=0 -while test $i -lt $n_shelves; do - sh -xc "sh $mkshelf $dir $i" - i=`expr $i + 1` -done diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh b/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh deleted file mode 100644 index 3261581..0000000 --- a/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -#! /bin/sh - -if test "$#" != "2"; then - echo "Usage: sh `basename $0` {dir} {shelfaddress}" 1>&2 - echo " n_partitions=16 sh `basename $0` {dir} {shelfaddress}" 1>&2 - exit 1 -fi -n_partitions=${n_partitions:-16} -dir=$1 -shelf=$2 -nslots=16 -maxslot=`echo $nslots 1 - p | dc` -MAJOR=152 - -set -e - -minor=`echo $nslots \* $shelf \* $n_partitions | bc` -endp=`echo $n_partitions - 1 | bc` -for slot in `seq 0 $maxslot`; do - for part in `seq 0 $endp`; do - name=e$shelf.$slot - test "$part" != "0" && name=${name}p$part - rm -f $dir/$name - mknod -m 0660 $dir/$name b $MAJOR $minor - - minor=`expr $minor + 1` - done -done diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/status.sh b/Documentation/aoe/status.sh index 751f3be..eeec7ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/aoe/status.sh +++ b/Documentation/aoe/status.sh @@ -1,5 +1,8 @@ #! /bin/sh # collate and present sysfs information about AoE storage +# +# A more complete version of this script is aoe-stat, in the +# aoetools. set -e format="%8s\t%8s\t%8s\n" diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Booting b/Documentation/arm/Booting index a341d87..0c1f475 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Booting +++ b/Documentation/arm/Booting @@ -154,13 +154,33 @@ In either case, the following conditions must be met: - CPU mode All forms of interrupts must be disabled (IRQs and FIQs) - The CPU must be in SVC mode. (A special exception exists for Angel) + + For CPUs which do not include the ARM virtualization extensions, the + CPU must be in SVC mode. (A special exception exists for Angel) + + CPUs which include support for the virtualization extensions can be + entered in HYP mode in order to enable the kernel to make full use of + these extensions. This is the recommended boot method for such CPUs, + unless the virtualisations are already in use by a pre-installed + hypervisor. + + If the kernel is not entered in HYP mode for any reason, it must be + entered in SVC mode. - Caches, MMUs The MMU must be off. Instruction cache may be on or off. Data cache must be off. + If the kernel is entered in HYP mode, the above requirements apply to + the HYP mode configuration in addition to the ordinary PL1 (privileged + kernel modes) configuration. In addition, all traps into the + hypervisor must be disabled, and PL1 access must be granted for all + peripherals and CPU resources for which this is architecturally + possible. Except for entering in HYP mode, the system configuration + should be such that a kernel which does not include support for the + virtualization extensions can boot correctly without extra help. + - The boot loader is expected to call the kernel image by jumping directly to the first instruction of the kernel image. diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index e418dc0..8df5e8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -465,7 +465,6 @@ struct bio { bio_end_io_t *bi_end_io; /* bi_end_io (bio) */ atomic_t bi_cnt; /* pin count: free when it hits zero */ void *bi_private; - bio_destructor_t *bi_destructor; /* bi_destructor (bio) */ }; With this multipage bio design: @@ -647,10 +646,6 @@ for a non-clone bio. There are the 6 pools setup for different size biovecs, so bio_alloc(gfp_mask, nr_iovecs) will allocate a vec_list of the given size from these slabs. -The bi_destructor() routine takes into account the possibility of the bio -having originated from a different source (see later discussions on -n/w to block transfers and kvec_cb) - The bio_get() routine may be used to hold an extra reference on a bio prior to i/o submission, if the bio fields are likely to be accessed after the i/o is issued (since the bio may otherwise get freed in case i/o completion diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 4372e6b..c07f7b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -18,16 +18,16 @@ from the rest of the system. The article on LWN [12] mentions some probable uses of the memory controller. The memory controller can be used to a. Isolate an application or a group of applications - Memory hungry applications can be isolated and limited to a smaller + Memory-hungry applications can be isolated and limited to a smaller amount of memory. -b. Create a cgroup with limited amount of memory, this can be used +b. Create a cgroup with a limited amount of memory; this can be used as a good alternative to booting with mem=XXXX. c. Virtualization solutions can control the amount of memory they want to assign to a virtual machine instance. d. A CD/DVD burner could control the amount of memory used by the rest of the system to ensure that burning does not fail due to lack of available memory. -e. There are several other use cases, find one or use the controller just +e. There are several other use cases; find one or use the controller just for fun (to learn and hack on the VM subsystem). Current Status: linux-2.6.34-mmotm(development version of 2010/April) @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ Features: - optionally, memory+swap usage can be accounted and limited. - hierarchical accounting - soft limit - - moving(recharging) account at moving a task is selectable. + - moving (recharging) account at moving a task is selectable. - usage threshold notifier - oom-killer disable knob and oom-notifier - Root cgroup has no limit controls. - Kernel memory support is work in progress, and the current version provides + Kernel memory support is a work in progress, and the current version provides basically functionality. (See Section 2.7) Brief summary of control files. @@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ Figure 1 shows the important aspects of the controller 3. Each page has a pointer to the page_cgroup, which in turn knows the cgroup it belongs to -The accounting is done as follows: mem_cgroup_charge() is invoked to setup +The accounting is done as follows: mem_cgroup_charge() is invoked to set up the necessary data structures and check if the cgroup that is being charged -is over its limit. If it is then reclaim is invoked on the cgroup. +is over its limit. If it is, then reclaim is invoked on the cgroup. More details can be found in the reclaim section of this document. If everything goes well, a page meta-data-structure called page_cgroup is updated. page_cgroup has its own LRU on cgroup. @@ -163,13 +163,13 @@ for earlier. A file page will be accounted for as Page Cache when it's inserted into inode (radix-tree). While it's mapped into the page tables of processes, duplicate accounting is carefully avoided. -A RSS page is unaccounted when it's fully unmapped. A PageCache page is +An RSS page is unaccounted when it's fully unmapped. A PageCache page is unaccounted when it's removed from radix-tree. Even if RSS pages are fully unmapped (by kswapd), they may exist as SwapCache in the system until they -are really freed. Such SwapCaches also also accounted. +are really freed. Such SwapCaches are also accounted. A swapped-in page is not accounted until it's mapped. -Note: The kernel does swapin-readahead and read multiple swaps at once. +Note: The kernel does swapin-readahead and reads multiple swaps at once. This means swapped-in pages may contain pages for other tasks than a task causing page fault. So, we avoid accounting at swap-in I/O. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ memsw.limit_in_bytes. Example: Assume a system with 4G of swap. A task which allocates 6G of memory (by mistake) under 2G memory limitation will use all swap. In this case, setting memsw.limit_in_bytes=3G will prevent bad use of swap. -By using memsw limit, you can avoid system OOM which can be caused by swap +By using the memsw limit, you can avoid system OOM which can be caused by swap shortage. * why 'memory+swap' rather than swap. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of memory+swap. In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without affecting global LRU, memory+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from -OS point of view. +an OS point of view. * What happens when a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes When a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes, it's useless to do swap-out @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ an OOM routine is invoked to select and kill the bulkiest task in the cgroup. (See 10. OOM Control below.) The reclaim algorithm has not been modified for cgroups, except that -pages that are selected for reclaiming come from the per cgroup LRU +pages that are selected for reclaiming come from the per-cgroup LRU list. NOTE: Reclaim does not work for the root cgroup, since we cannot set any @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ We can check the usage: # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.usage_in_bytes 1216512 -A successful write to this file does not guarantee a successful set of +A successful write to this file does not guarantee a successful setting of this limit to the value written into the file. This can be due to a number of factors, such as rounding up to page boundaries or the total availability of memory on the system. The user is required to re-read @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Trying usual test under memory controller is always helpful. 4.1 Troubleshooting Sometimes a user might find that the application under a cgroup is -terminated by OOM killer. There are several causes for this: +terminated by the OOM killer. There are several causes for this: 1. The cgroup limit is too low (just too low to do anything useful) 2. The user is using anonymous memory and swap is turned off or too low @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ terminated by OOM killer. There are several causes for this: A sync followed by echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches will help get rid of some of the pages cached in the cgroup (page cache pages). -To know what happens, disable OOM_Kill by 10. OOM Control(see below) and +To know what happens, disabling OOM_Kill as per "10. OOM Control" (below) and seeing what happens will be helpful. 4.2 Task migration @@ -399,10 +399,10 @@ About use_hierarchy, see Section 6. Almost all pages tracked by this memory cgroup will be unmapped and freed. Some pages cannot be freed because they are locked or in-use. Such pages are - moved to parent(if use_hierarchy==1) or root (if use_hierarchy==0) and this + moved to parent (if use_hierarchy==1) or root (if use_hierarchy==0) and this cgroup will be empty. - Typical use case of this interface is that calling this before rmdir(). + The typical use case for this interface is before calling rmdir(). Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file. For efficiency, as other kernel components, memory cgroup uses some optimization to avoid unnecessary cacheline false sharing. usage_in_bytes is affected by the -method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory(and swap) usage, it's an fuzz +method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory (and swap) usage, it's a fuzz value for efficient access. (Of course, when necessary, it's synchronized.) If you want to know more exact memory usage, you should use RSS+CACHE(+SWAP) value in memory.stat(see 5.2). @@ -496,8 +496,8 @@ value in memory.stat(see 5.2). This is similar to numa_maps but operates on a per-memcg basis. This is useful for providing visibility into the numa locality information within an memcg since the pages are allowed to be allocated from any physical -node. One of the usecases is evaluating application performance by -combining this information with the application's cpu allocation. +node. One of the use cases is evaluating application performance by +combining this information with the application's CPU allocation. We export "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable" pages per-node for each memcg. The ouput format of memory.numa_stat is: @@ -561,10 +561,10 @@ are pushed back to their soft limits. If the soft limit of each control group is very high, they are pushed back as much as possible to make sure that one control group does not starve the others of memory. -Please note that soft limits is a best effort feature, it comes with +Please note that soft limits is a best-effort feature; it comes with no guarantees, but it does its best to make sure that when memory is heavily contended for, memory is allocated based on the soft limit -hints/setup. Currently soft limit based reclaim is setup such that +hints/setup. Currently soft limit based reclaim is set up such that it gets invoked from balance_pgdat (kswapd). 7.1 Interface @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ page tables. 8.1 Interface -This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled(and disabled again) by +This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabledi (and disabled again) by writing to memory.move_charge_at_immigrate of the destination cgroup. If you want to enable it: @@ -601,8 +601,8 @@ If you want to enable it: Note: Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of charges should be moved. See 8.2 for details. -Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, IOW, a leader of a thread - group. +Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, in other words, + a leader of a thread group. Note: If we cannot find enough space for the task in the destination cgroup, we try to make space by reclaiming memory. Task migration may fail if we cannot make enough space. @@ -612,25 +612,25 @@ And if you want disable it again: # echo 0 > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate -8.2 Type of charges which can be move +8.2 Type of charges which can be moved -Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of -charges should be moved. But in any cases, it must be noted that an account of -a page or a swap can be moved only when it is charged to the task's current(old) -memory cgroup. +Each bit in move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of +charges should be moved. But in any case, it must be noted that an account of +a page or a swap can be moved only when it is charged to the task's current +(old) memory cgroup. bit | what type of charges would be moved ? -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------ - 0 | A charge of an anonymous page(or swap of it) used by the target task. - | You must enable Swap Extension(see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges. + 0 | A charge of an anonymous page (or swap of it) used by the target task. + | You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges. -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------ - 1 | A charge of file pages(normal file, tmpfs file(e.g. ipc shared memory) + 1 | A charge of file pages (normal file, tmpfs file (e.g. ipc shared memory) | and swaps of tmpfs file) mmapped by the target task. Unlike the case of - | anonymous pages, file pages(and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task + | anonymous pages, file pages (and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task | will be moved even if the task hasn't done page fault, i.e. they might | not be the task's "RSS", but other task's "RSS" that maps the same file. - | And mapcount of the page is ignored(the page can be moved even if - | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension(see 2.4) to + | And mapcount of the page is ignored (the page can be moved even if + | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to | enable move of swap charges. 8.3 TODO @@ -640,11 +640,11 @@ memory cgroup. 9. Memory thresholds -Memory cgroup implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification +Memory cgroup implements memory thresholds using the cgroups notification API (see cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple memory and memsw thresholds and gets notifications when it crosses. -To register a threshold application need: +To register a threshold, an application must: - create an eventfd using eventfd(2); - open memory.usage_in_bytes or memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes; - write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.usage_in_bytes> <threshold>" to @@ -659,24 +659,24 @@ It's applicable for root and non-root cgroup. memory.oom_control file is for OOM notification and other controls. -Memory cgroup implements OOM notifier using cgroup notification +Memory cgroup implements OOM notifier using the cgroup notification API (See cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple OOM notification delivery and gets notification when OOM happens. -To register a notifier, application need: +To register a notifier, an application must: - create an eventfd using eventfd(2) - open memory.oom_control file - write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.oom_control>" to cgroup.event_control -Application will be notified through eventfd when OOM happens. -OOM notification doesn't work for root cgroup. +The application will be notified through eventfd when OOM happens. +OOM notification doesn't work for the root cgroup. -You can disable OOM-killer by writing "1" to memory.oom_control file, as: +You can disable the OOM-killer by writing "1" to memory.oom_control file, as: #echo 1 > memory.oom_control -This operation is only allowed to the top cgroup of sub-hierarchy. +This operation is only allowed to the top cgroup of a sub-hierarchy. If OOM-killer is disabled, tasks under cgroup will hang/sleep in memory cgroup's OOM-waitqueue when they request accountable memory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards index 91f2614..fc81a7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards @@ -1,3 +1,15 @@ +ARM Integrator/AP (Application Platform) and Integrator/CP (Compact Platform) +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +ARM's oldest Linux-supported platform with connectors for different core +tiles of ARMv4, ARMv5 and ARMv6 type. + +Required properties (in root node): + compatible = "arm,integrator-ap"; /* Application Platform */ + compatible = "arm,integrator-cp"; /* Compact Platform */ + +FPGA type interrupt controllers, see the versatile-fpga-irq binding doc. + + ARM Versatile Application and Platform Baseboards ------------------------------------------------- ARM's development hardware platform with connectors for customizable diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e37241f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +* Texas Instruments Davinci NAND + +This file provides information, what the device node for the +davinci nand interface contain. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,davinci-nand"; +- reg : contain 2 offset/length values: + - offset and length for the access window + - offset and length for accessing the aemif control registers +- ti,davinci-chipselect: Indicates on the davinci_nand driver which + chipselect is used for accessing the nand. + +Recommended properties : +- ti,davinci-mask-ale: mask for ale +- ti,davinci-mask-cle: mask for cle +- ti,davinci-mask-chipsel: mask for chipselect +- ti,davinci-ecc-mode: ECC mode valid values for davinci driver: + - "none" + - "soft" + - "hw" +- ti,davinci-ecc-bits: used ECC bits, currently supported 1 or 4. +- ti,davinci-nand-buswidth: buswidth 8 or 16 +- ti,davinci-nand-use-bbt: use flash based bad block table support. + +Example (enbw_cmc board): +aemif@60000000 { + compatible = "ti,davinci-aemif"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x68000000 0x80000>; + ranges = <2 0 0x60000000 0x02000000 + 3 0 0x62000000 0x02000000 + 4 0 0x64000000 0x02000000 + 5 0 0x66000000 0x02000000 + 6 0 0x68000000 0x02000000>; + nand@3,0 { + compatible = "ti,davinci-nand"; + reg = <3 0x0 0x807ff + 6 0x0 0x8000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ti,davinci-chipselect = <1>; + ti,davinci-mask-ale = <0>; + ti,davinci-mask-cle = <0>; + ti,davinci-mask-chipsel = <0>; + ti,davinci-ecc-mode = "hw"; + ti,davinci-ecc-bits = <4>; + ti,davinci-nand-use-bbt; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9989eda --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +* ARM Versatile FPGA interrupt controller + +One or more FPGA IRQ controllers can be synthesized in an ARM reference board +such as the Integrator or Versatile family. The output of these different +controllers are OR:ed together and fed to the CPU tile's IRQ input. Each +instance can handle up to 32 interrupts. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "arm,versatile-fpga-irq" +- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. Must be 1 + as the FPGA IRQ controller has no configuration options for interrupt + sources. The cell is a u32 and defines the interrupt number. +- reg: The register bank for the FPGA interrupt controller. +- clear-mask: a u32 number representing the mask written to clear all IRQs + on the controller at boot for example. +- valid-mask: a u32 number representing a bit mask determining which of + the interrupts are valid. Unconnected/unused lines are set to 0, and + the system till not make it possible for devices to request these + interrupts. + +Example: + +pic: pic@14000000 { + compatible = "arm,versatile-fpga-irq"; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0x14000000 0x100>; + clear-mask = <0xffffffff>; + valid-mask = <0x003fffff>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f7b9c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Xen hypervisor device tree bindings + +Xen ARM virtual platforms shall have a top-level "hypervisor" node with +the following properties: + +- compatible: + compatible = "xen,xen-<version>", "xen,xen"; + where <version> is the version of the Xen ABI of the platform. + +- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of a region in + memory where the grant table should be mapped to, using an + HYPERVISOR_memory_op hypercall. The memory region is large enough to map + the whole grant table (it is larger or equal to gnttab_max_grant_frames()). + +- interrupts: the interrupt used by Xen to inject event notifications. + A GIC node is also required. + + +Example (assuming #address-cells = <2> and #size-cells = <2>): + +hypervisor { + compatible = "xen,xen-4.3", "xen,xen"; + reg = <0 0xb0000000 0 0x20000>; + interrupts = <1 15 0xf08>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt index bf57ecd..bd7ce12 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Copyright (C) 2008-2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Node -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Memory Node -Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node + -Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Low Power (LP) RTC Node -Full Example NOTE: the SEC 4 is also known as Freescale's Cryptographic Accelerator @@ -294,6 +295,27 @@ Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node address and length of the SEC4 configuration registers. + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing physical addresses in child nodes. Must + have a value of 1. + + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing the size of physical addresses in + child nodes. Must have a value of 1. + + - ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + range of the SNVS register space. A triplet that includes + the child address, parent address, & length. + - interrupts Usage: required Value type: <prop_encoded-array> @@ -314,11 +336,34 @@ EXAMPLE sec_mon@314000 { compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon"; reg = <0x314000 0x1000>; + ranges = <0 0x314000 0x1000>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; interrupts = <93 2>; }; ===================================================================== +Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Low Power (LP) RTC Node + + A SNVS child node that defines SNVS LP RTC. + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + address and length of the SNVS LP configuration registers. + +EXAMPLE + sec_mon_rtc_lp@314000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp"; + reg = <0x34 0x58>; + }; + +===================================================================== FULL EXAMPLE crypto: crypto@300000 { @@ -390,8 +435,14 @@ FULL EXAMPLE sec_mon: sec_mon@314000 { compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon"; reg = <0x314000 0x1000>; + ranges = <0 0x314000 0x1000>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; interrupts = <93 2>; + + sec_mon_rtc_lp@34 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp"; + reg = <0x34 0x58>; + }; }; ===================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47229b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Marvell Cryptographic Engines And Security Accelerator + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "marvell,orion-crypto" +- reg : base physical address of the engine and length of memory mapped + region, followed by base physical address of sram and its memory + length +- reg-names : "regs" , "sram"; +- interrupts : interrupt number + +Examples: + + crypto@30000 { + compatible = "marvell,orion-crypto"; + reg = <0x30000 0x10000>, + <0x4000000 0x800>; + reg-names = "regs" , "sram"; + interrupts = <22>; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2dd457a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Bindings for fan connected to GPIO lines + +Required properties: +- compatible : "gpio-fan" +- gpios: Specifies the pins that map to bits in the control value, + ordered MSB-->LSB. +- gpio-fan,speed-map: A mapping of possible fan RPM speeds and the + control value that should be set to achieve them. This array + must have the RPM values in ascending order. + +Optional properties: +- alarm-gpios: This pin going active indicates something is wrong with + the fan, and a udev event will be fired. + +Examples: + + gpio_fan { + compatible = "gpio-fan"; + gpios = <&gpio1 14 1 + &gpio1 13 1>; + gpio-fan,speed-map = <0 0 + 3000 1 + 6000 2>; + alarm-gpios = <&gpio1 15 1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6f3bec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +* Marvell EBU GPIO controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be "marvell,orion-gpio", "marvell,mv78200-gpio" + or "marvell,armadaxp-gpio". "marvell,orion-gpio" should be used for + Orion, Kirkwood, Dove, Discovery (except MV78200) and Armada + 370. "marvell,mv78200-gpio" should be used for the Discovery + MV78200. "marvel,armadaxp-gpio" should be used for all Armada XP + SoCs (MV78230, MV78260, MV78460). + +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. Only one + entry is expected, except for the "marvell,armadaxp-gpio" variant + for which two entries are expected: one for the general registers, + one for the per-cpu registers. + +- interrupts: The list of interrupts that are used for all the pins + managed by this GPIO bank. There can be more than one interrupt + (example: 1 interrupt per 8 pins on Armada XP, which means 4 + interrupts per bank of 32 GPIOs). + +- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller + +- #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. Should be two. + The first cell is the GPIO number. + The second cell is used to specify flags: + bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags: + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered. + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered. + 4 = active high level-sensitive. + 8 = active low level-sensitive. + +- gpio-controller: marks the device node as a gpio controller + +- ngpios: number of GPIOs this controller has + +- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number. The + second cell is reserved for flags, unused at the moment. + +Example: + + gpio0: gpio@d0018100 { + compatible = "marvell,armadaxp-gpio"; + reg = <0xd0018100 0x40>, + <0xd0018800 0x30>; + ngpios = <32>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <16>, <17>, <18>, <19>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/atmel-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/atmel-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b689a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/atmel-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +I2C for Atmel platforms + +Required properties : +- compatible : Must be "atmel,at91rm9200-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9261-i2c", + "atmel,at91sam9260-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9g20-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9g10-i2c" + or "atmel,at91sam9x5-i2c" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. +- #address-cells = <1>; +- #size-cells = <0>; + +Optional properties: +- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding + +Examples : + +i2c0: i2c@fff84000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g20-i2c"; + reg = <0xfff84000 0x100>; + interrupts = <12 4 6>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + 24c512@50 { + compatible = "24c512"; + reg = <0x50>; + pagesize = <128>; + } +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/davinci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/davinci.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2dc935b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/davinci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +* Texas Instruments Davinci I2C + +This file provides information, what the device node for the +davinci i2c interface contain. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,davinci-i2c"; +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device + +Recommended properties : +- interrupts : standard interrupt property. +- clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. + +Example (enbw_cmc board): + i2c@1c22000 { + compatible = "ti,davinci-i2c"; + reg = <0x22000 0x1000>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; + interrupts = <15>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + dtt@48 { + compatible = "national,lm75"; + reg = <0x48>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt index 30ac3a0..7a3fe9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: Should contain ERROR and DMA interrupts - clock-frequency: Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. Only 100000Hz and 400000Hz modes are supported. +- fsl,i2c-dma-channel: APBX DMA channel for the I2C Examples: @@ -16,4 +17,5 @@ i2c0: i2c@80058000 { reg = <0x80058000 2000>; interrupts = <111 68>; clock-frequency = <100000>; + fsl,i2c-dma-channel = <6>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nomadik.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72065b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nomadik.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +I2C for Nomadik based systems + +Required (non-standard) properties: + - Nil + +Recommended (non-standard) properties: + - clock-frequency : Maximum bus clock frequency for the device + +Optional (non-standard) properties: + - Nil + +Example : + +i2c@80004000 { + compatible = "stericsson,db8500-i2c", "st,nomadik-i2c"; + reg = <0x80004000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 21 0x4>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + v-i2c-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>; + + clock-frequency = <400000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt index 548892c..7da578d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ as "armctrl" in the SoC documentation, hence naming of this binding. Required properties: -- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt" +- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic" - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72a06c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +Specifying interrupt information for devices +============================================ + +1) Interrupt client nodes +------------------------- + +Nodes that describe devices which generate interrupts must contain an +"interrupts" property. This property must contain a list of interrupt +specifiers, one per output interrupt. The format of the interrupt specifier is +determined by the interrupt controller to which the interrupts are routed; see +section 2 below for details. + +The "interrupt-parent" property is used to specify the controller to which +interrupts are routed and contains a single phandle referring to the interrupt +controller node. This property is inherited, so it may be specified in an +interrupt client node or in any of its parent nodes. + +2) Interrupt controller nodes +----------------------------- + +A device is marked as an interrupt controller with the "interrupt-controller" +property. This is a empty, boolean property. An additional "#interrupt-cells" +property defines the number of cells needed to specify a single interrupt. + +It is the responsibility of the interrupt controller's binding to define the +length and format of the interrupt specifier. The following two variants are +commonly used: + + a) one cell + ----------- + The #interrupt-cells property is set to 1 and the single cell defines the + index of the interrupt within the controller. + + Example: + + vic: intc@10140000 { + compatible = "arm,versatile-vic"; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x10140000 0x1000>; + }; + + sic: intc@10003000 { + compatible = "arm,versatile-sic"; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x10003000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&vic>; + interrupts = <31>; /* Cascaded to vic */ + }; + + b) two cells + ------------ + The #interrupt-cells property is set to 2 and the first cell defines the + index of the interrupt within the controller, while the second cell is used + to specify any of the following flags: + - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered + 4 = active high level-sensitive + 8 = active low level-sensitive + + Example: + + i2c@7000c000 { + gpioext: gpio-adnp@41 { + compatible = "ad,gpio-adnp"; + reg = <0x41>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <160 1>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <1>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + nr-gpios = <64>; + }; + + sx8634@2b { + compatible = "smtc,sx8634"; + reg = <0x2b>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpioext>; + interrupts = <3 0x8>; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + threshold = <0x40>; + sensitivity = <7>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..63f3ee3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +* Marvell 88PM860x Power Management IC + +Required parent device properties: +- compatible : "marvell,88pm860x" +- reg : the I2C slave address for the 88pm860x chip +- interrupts : IRQ line for the 88pm860x chip +- interrupt-controller: describes the 88pm860x as an interrupt controller (has its own domain) +- #interrupt-cells : should be 1. + - The cell is the 88pm860x local IRQ number + +Optional parent device properties: +- marvell,88pm860x-irq-read-clr: inicates whether interrupt status is cleared by read +- marvell,88pm860x-slave-addr: 88pm860x are two chips solution. <reg> stores the I2C address + of one chip, and this property stores the I2C address of + another chip. + +88pm860x consists of a large and varied group of sub-devices: + +Device Supply Names Description +------ ------------ ----------- +88pm860x-onkey : : On key +88pm860x-rtc : : RTC +88pm8607 : : Regulators +88pm860x-backlight : : Backlight +88pm860x-led : : Led +88pm860x-touch : : Touchscreen + +Example: + + pmic: 88pm860x@34 { + compatible = "marvell,88pm860x"; + reg = <0x34>; + interrupts = <4>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + marvell,88pm860x-irq-read-clr; + marvell,88pm860x-slave-addr = <0x11>; + + regulators { + BUCK1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + LDO1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + }; + rtc { + marvell,88pm860x-vrtc = <1>; + }; + touch { + marvell,88pm860x-gpadc-prebias = <1>; + marvell,88pm860x-gpadc-slot-cycle = <1>; + marvell,88pm860x-tsi-prebias = <6>; + marvell,88pm860x-pen-prebias = <16>; + marvell,88pm860x-pen-prechg = <2>; + marvell,88pm860x-resistor-X = <300>; + }; + backlights { + backlight-0 { + marvell,88pm860x-iset = <4>; + marvell,88pm860x-pwm = <3>; + }; + backlight-2 { + }; + }; + leds { + led0-red { + marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>; + }; + led0-green { + marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>; + }; + led0-blue { + marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe8150b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* System Controller Registers R/W driver + +System controller node represents a register region containing a set +of miscellaneous registers. The registers are not cohesive enough to +represent as any specific type of device. The typical use-case is for +some other node's driver, or platform-specific code, to acquire a +reference to the syscon node (e.g. by phandle, node path, or search +using a specific compatible value), interrogate the node (or associated +OS driver) to determine the location of the registers, and access the +registers directly. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "syscon". +- reg: the register region can be accessed from syscon + +Examples: +gpr: iomuxc-gpr@020e0000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx6q-iomuxc-gpr", "syscon"; + reg = <0x020e0000 0x38>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt index db03599..2e33048 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt @@ -59,6 +59,8 @@ Optional properties: in TPS6591X datasheet) - ti,en-gpio-sleep: enable sleep control for gpios There should be 9 entries here, one for each gpio. +- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling + the system power. Regulator Optional properties: - ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control: enable external sleep @@ -79,6 +81,8 @@ Example: #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupt-controller; + ti,system-power-controller; + ti,vmbch-threshold = 0; ti,vmbch2-threshold = 0; ti,en-ck32k-xtal; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..414d2ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +Texas Instruments TWL family (twl4030) audio module + +The audio module inside the TWL family consist of an audio codec and a vibra +driver. + +Required properties: +- compatible : must be "ti,twl4030-audio" + +Optional properties, nodes: + +Audio functionality: +- codec { }: Need to be present if the audio functionality is used. Within this + section the following options can be used: +- ti,digimic_delay: Delay need after enabling the digimic to reduce artifacts + from the start of the recorded sample (in ms) +-ti,ramp_delay_value: HS ramp delay configuration to reduce pop noise +-ti,hs_extmute: Use external mute for HS pop reduction +-ti,hs_extmute_gpio: Use external GPIO to control the external mute +-ti,offset_cncl_path: Offset cancellation path selection, refer to TRM for the + valid values. + +Vibra functionality +- ti,enable-vibra: Need to be set to <1> if the vibra functionality is used. if + missing or it is 0, the vibra functionality is disabled. + +Example: +&i2c1 { + clock-frequency = <2600000>; + + twl: twl@48 { + reg = <0x48>; + interrupts = <7>; /* SYS_NIRQ cascaded to intc */ + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + + twl_audio: audio { + compatible = "ti,twl4030-audio"; + + ti,enable-vibra = <1>; + + codec { + ti,ramp_delay_value = <3>; + }; + + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt index c855240..0f5dd70 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Texas Instruments TWL6040 family -The TWL6040s are 8-channel high quality low-power audio codecs providing audio -and vibra functionality on OMAP4+ platforms. +The TWL6040s are 8-channel high quality low-power audio codecs providing audio, +vibra and GPO functionality on OMAP4+ platforms. They are connected ot the host processor via i2c for commands, McPDM for audio data and commands. @@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ Required properties: - reg: must be 0x4b for i2c address - interrupts: twl6040 has one interrupt line connecteded to the main SoC - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller +- gpio-controller: +- #gpio-cells = <1>: twl6040 provides GPO lines. - twl6040,audpwron-gpio: Power on GPIO line for the twl6040 - vio-supply: Regulator for the twl6040 VIO supply @@ -37,7 +39,6 @@ Example: &i2c1 { twl6040: twl@4b { compatible = "ti,twl6040"; - reg = <0x4b>; interrupts = <0 119 4>; interrupt-parent = <&gic>; @@ -60,3 +61,5 @@ Example: }; }; }; + +/include/ "twl6040.dtsi" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bdfffb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +IFM camera sensor interface on mpc5200 LocalPlus bus + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ifm,o2d-csi" +- reg: specifies sensor chip select number and associated address range +- interrupts: external interrupt line number and interrupt sense mode + of the interrupt line signaling frame valid events +- gpios: three gpio-specifiers for "capture", "reset" and "master enable" + GPIOs (strictly in this order). +- ifm,csi-clk-handle: the phandle to a node in the DT describing the sensor + clock generator. This node is usually a general purpose timer controller. +- ifm,csi-addr-bus-width: address bus width (valid values are 16, 24, 25) +- ifm,csi-data-bus-width: data bus width (valid values are 8 and 16) +- ifm,csi-wait-cycles: sensor bus wait cycles + +Optional properties: +- ifm,csi-byte-swap: if this property is present, the byte swapping on + the bus will be enabled. + +Example: + + csi@3,0 { + compatible = "ifm,o2d-csi"; + reg = <3 0 0x00100000>; /* CS 3, 1 MiB range */ + interrupts = <1 1 2>; /* IRQ1, edge falling */ + + ifm,csi-clk-handle = <&timer7>; + gpios = <&gpio_simple 23 0 /* image_capture */ + &gpio_simple 26 0 /* image_reset */ + &gpio_simple 29 0>; /* image_master_en */ + + ifm,csi-addr-bus-width = <24>; + ifm,csi-data-bus-width = <8>; + ifm,csi-wait-cycles = <0>; + }; + +The base address of the used chip select is specified in the +ranges property of the parent localbus node, for example: + + ranges = <0 0 0xff000000 0x01000000 + 3 0 0xe3000000 0x00100000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a85c70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +* Atmel High Speed MultiMedia Card Interface + +This controller on atmel products provides an interface for MMC, SD and SDIO +types of memory cards. + +This file documents differences between the core properties described +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the atmel-mci driver. + +1) MCI node + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "atmel,hsmci" +- #address-cells: should be one. The cell is the slot id. +- #size-cells: should be zero. +- at least one slot node + +The node contains child nodes for each slot that the platform uses + +Example MCI node: + +mmc0: mmc@f0008000 { + compatible = "atmel,hsmci"; + reg = <0xf0008000 0x600>; + interrupts = <12 4>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + [ child node definitions...] +}; + +2) slot nodes + +Required properties: +- reg: should contain the slot id. +- bus-width: number of data lines connected to the controller + +Optional properties: +- cd-gpios: specify GPIOs for card detection +- cd-inverted: invert the value of external card detect gpio line +- wp-gpios: specify GPIOs for write protection + +Example slot node: + +slot@0 { + reg = <0>; + bus-width = <4>; + cd-gpios = <&pioD 15 0> + cd-inverted; +}; + +Example full MCI node: +mmc0: mmc@f0008000 { + compatible = "atmel,hsmci"; + reg = <0xf0008000 0x600>; + interrupts = <12 4>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + slot@0 { + reg = <0>; + bus-width = <4>; + cd-gpios = <&pioD 15 0> + cd-inverted; + }; + slot@1 { + reg = <1>; + bus-width = <4>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7927689 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +* Samsung Exynos specific extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile + Storage Host Controller + +The Synopsis designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents +differences between the core Synopsis dw mshc controller properties described +by synposis-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Samsung Exynos specific +extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. + +Required Properties: + +* compatible: should be + - "samsung,exynos4210-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos4210 + specific extentions. + - "samsung,exynos4412-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos4412 + specific extentions. + - "samsung,exynos5250-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos5250 + specific extentions. + +* samsung,dw-mshc-ciu-div: Specifies the divider value for the card interface + unit (ciu) clock. This property is applicable only for Exynos5 SoC's and + ignored for Exynos4 SoC's. The valid range of divider value is 0 to 7. + +* samsung,dw-mshc-sdr-timing: Specifies the value of CIU clock phase shift value + in transmit mode and CIU clock phase shift value in receive mode for single + data rate mode operation. Refer notes below for the order of the cells and the + valid values. + +* samsung,dw-mshc-ddr-timing: Specifies the value of CUI clock phase shift value + in transmit mode and CIU clock phase shift value in receive mode for double + data rate mode operation. Refer notes below for the order of the cells and the + valid values. + + Notes for the sdr-timing and ddr-timing values: + + The order of the cells should be + - First Cell: CIU clock phase shift value for tx mode. + - Second Cell: CIU clock phase shift value for rx mode. + + Valid values for SDR and DDR CIU clock timing for Exynos5250: + - valid value for tx phase shift and rx phase shift is 0 to 7. + - when CIU clock divider value is set to 3, all possible 8 phase shift + values can be used. + - if CIU clock divider value is 0 (that is divide by 1), both tx and rx + phase shift clocks should be 0. + +Required properties for a slot: + +* gpios: specifies a list of gpios used for command, clock and data bus. The + first gpio is the command line and the second gpio is the clock line. The + rest of the gpios (depending on the bus-width property) are the data lines in + no particular order. The format of the gpio specifier depends on the gpio + controller. + +Example: + + The MSHC controller node can be split into two portions, SoC specific and + board specific portions as listed below. + + dwmmc0@12200000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-dw-mshc"; + reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 75 0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + dwmmc0@12200000 { + num-slots = <1>; + supports-highspeed; + broken-cd; + fifo-depth = <0x80>; + card-detect-delay = <200>; + samsung,dw-mshc-ciu-div = <3>; + samsung,dw-mshc-sdr-timing = <2 3>; + samsung,dw-mshc-ddr-timing = <1 2>; + + slot@0 { + reg = <0>; + bus-width = <8>; + gpios = <&gpc0 0 2 0 3>, <&gpc0 1 2 0 3>, + <&gpc1 0 2 3 3>, <&gpc1 1 2 3 3>, + <&gpc1 2 2 3 3>, <&gpc1 3 2 3 3>, + <&gpc0 3 2 3 3>, <&gpc0 4 2 3 3>, + <&gpc0 5 2 3 3>, <&gpc0 6 2 3 3>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt index 8a6811f..8e2e0ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt @@ -9,12 +9,17 @@ Interpreted by the OF core: Required properties: - bus-width: Number of data lines, can be <1>, <4>, or <8> +Card detection: +If no property below is supplied, standard SDHCI card detect is used. +Only one of the properties in this section should be supplied: + - broken-cd: There is no card detection available; polling must be used. + - cd-gpios: Specify GPIOs for card detection, see gpio binding + - non-removable: non-removable slot (like eMMC); assume always present. + Optional properties: -- cd-gpios: Specify GPIOs for card detection, see gpio binding - wp-gpios: Specify GPIOs for write protection, see gpio binding - cd-inverted: when present, polarity on the cd gpio line is inverted - wp-inverted: when present, polarity on the wp gpio line is inverted -- non-removable: non-removable slot (like eMMC) - max-frequency: maximum operating clock frequency Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7025de --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* PXA MMC drivers + +Driver bindings for the PXA MCI (MMC/SDIO) interfaces + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "marvell,pxa-mmc". +- vmmc-supply: A regulator for VMMC + +Optional properties: +- marvell,detect-delay-ms: sets the detection delay timeout in ms. +- marvell,gpio-power: GPIO spec for the card power enable pin + +This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt +and the properties used by the pxa-mmc driver. + +Examples: + +mmc0: mmc@41100000 { + compatible = "marvell,pxa-mmc"; + reg = <0x41100000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <23>; + cd-gpios = <&gpio 23 0>; + wp-gpios = <&gpio 24 0>; +}; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..630a7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +* Samsung's SDHCI Controller device tree bindings + +Samsung's SDHCI controller is used as a connectivity interface with external +MMC, SD and eMMC storage mediums. This file documents differences between the +core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the properties used by the +Samsung implmentation of the SDHCI controller. + +Note: The mmc core bindings documentation states that if none of the core +card-detect bindings are used, then the standard sdhci card detect mechanism +is used. The Samsung's SDHCI controller bindings extends this as listed below. + +[A] The property "samsung,cd-pinmux-gpio" can be used as stated in the + "Optional Board Specific Properties" section below. + +[B] If core card-detect bindings and "samsung,cd-pinmux-gpio" property + is not specified, it is assumed that there is no card detection + mechanism used. + +Required SoC Specific Properties: +- compatible: should be one of the following + - "samsung,s3c6410-sdhci": For controllers compatible with s3c6410 sdhci + controller. + - "samsung,exynos4210-sdhci": For controllers compatible with Exynos4 sdhci + controller. + +Required Board Specific Properties: +- gpios: Should specify the gpios used for clock, command and data lines. The + gpio specifier format depends on the gpio controller. + +Optional Board Specific Properties: +- samsung,cd-pinmux-gpio: Specifies the card detect line that is routed + through a pinmux to the card-detect pin of the card slot. This property + should be used only if none of the mmc core card-detect properties are + used. + +Example: + sdhci@12530000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-sdhci"; + reg = <0x12530000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 75 0>; + bus-width = <4>; + cd-gpios = <&gpk2 2 2 3 3>; + gpios = <&gpk2 0 2 0 3>, /* clock line */ + <&gpk2 1 2 0 3>, /* command line */ + <&gpk2 3 2 3 3>, /* data line 0 */ + <&gpk2 4 2 3 3>, /* data line 1 */ + <&gpk2 5 2 3 3>, /* data line 2 */ + <&gpk2 6 2 3 3>; /* data line 3 */ + }; + + Note: This example shows both SoC specific and board specific properties + in a single device node. The properties can be actually be seperated + into SoC specific node and board specific node. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae9aab9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* Marvell sdhci-dove controller + +This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt +and the properties used by the sdhci-pxav2 and sdhci-pxav3 drivers. + +- compatible: Should be "marvell,dove-sdhci". + +Example: + +sdio0: sdio@92000 { + compatible = "marvell,dove-sdhci"; + reg = <0x92000 0x100>; + interrupts = <35>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd3643e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +* SPEAr SDHCI Controller + +This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt +and the properties used by the sdhci-spear driver. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "st,spear300-sdhci" + +Optional properties: +- cd-gpios: card detect gpio, with zero flags. + +Example: + + sdhci@fc000000 { + compatible = "st,spear300-sdhci"; + reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>; + cd-gpios = <&gpio0 6 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synposis-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synposis-dw-mshc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..06cd32d08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synposis-dw-mshc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +* Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller + +The Synopsis designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents +differences between the core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the +properties used by the Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. + +Required Properties: + +* compatible: should be + - snps,dw-mshc: for controllers compliant with synopsis dw-mshc. +* #address-cells: should be 1. +* #size-cells: should be 0. + +# Slots: The slot specific information are contained within child-nodes with + each child-node representing a supported slot. There should be atleast one + child node representing a card slot. The name of the child node representing + the slot is recommended to be slot@n where n is the unique number of the slot + connnected to the controller. The following are optional properties which + can be included in the slot child node. + + * reg: specifies the physical slot number. The valid values of this + property is 0 to (num-slots -1), where num-slots is the value + specified by the num-slots property. + + * bus-width: as documented in mmc core bindings. + + * wp-gpios: specifies the write protect gpio line. The format of the + gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. If the write-protect + line is not available, this property is optional. + +Optional properties: + +* num-slots: specifies the number of slots supported by the controller. + The number of physical slots actually used could be equal or less than the + value specified by num-slots. If this property is not specified, the value + of num-slot property is assumed to be 1. + +* fifo-depth: The maximum size of the tx/rx fifo's. If this property is not + specified, the default value of the fifo size is determined from the + controller registers. + +* card-detect-delay: Delay in milli-seconds before detecting card after card + insert event. The default value is 0. + +* supports-highspeed: Enables support for high speed cards (upto 50MHz) + +* broken-cd: as documented in mmc core bindings. + +Aliases: + +- All the MSHC controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using + the following format 'mshc{n}' where n is a unique number for the alias. + +Example: + +The MSHC controller node can be split into two portions, SoC specific and +board specific portions as listed below. + + dwmmc0@12200000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-mshc"; + reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 75 0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + dwmmc0@12200000 { + num-slots = <1>; + supports-highspeed; + broken-cd; + fifo-depth = <0x80>; + card-detect-delay = <200>; + + slot@0 { + reg = <0>; + bus-width = <8>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt index a200695..d555421 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt @@ -3,7 +3,9 @@ Atmel NAND flash Required properties: - compatible : "atmel,at91rm9200-nand". - reg : should specify localbus address and size used for the chip, - and if availlable the ECC. + and hardware ECC controller if available. + If the hardware ECC is PMECC, it should contain address and size for + PMECC, PMECC Error Location controller and ROM which has lookup tables. - atmel,nand-addr-offset : offset for the address latch. - atmel,nand-cmd-offset : offset for the command latch. - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes @@ -16,6 +18,15 @@ Optional properties: - nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode, soft by default. Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome", "hw_oob_first", "soft_bch". +- atmel,has-pmecc : boolean to enable Programmable Multibit ECC hardware. + Only supported by at91sam9x5 or later sam9 product. +- atmel,pmecc-cap : error correct capability for Programmable Multibit ECC + Controller. Supported values are: 2, 4, 8, 12, 24. +- atmel,pmecc-sector-size : sector size for ECC computation. Supported values + are: 512, 1024. +- atmel,pmecc-lookup-table-offset : includes two offsets of lookup table in ROM + for different sector size. First one is for sector size 512, the next is for + sector size 1024. - nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8 - nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false @@ -39,3 +50,30 @@ nand0: nand@40000000,0 { ... }; }; + +/* for PMECC supported chips */ +nand0: nand@40000000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-nand"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = < 0x40000000 0x10000000 /* bus addr & size */ + 0xffffe000 0x00000600 /* PMECC addr & size */ + 0xffffe600 0x00000200 /* PMECC ERRLOC addr & size */ + 0x00100000 0x00100000 /* ROM addr & size */ + >; + atmel,nand-addr-offset = <21>; /* ale */ + atmel,nand-cmd-offset = <22>; /* cle */ + nand-on-flash-bbt; + nand-ecc-mode = "hw"; + atmel,has-pmecc; /* enable PMECC */ + atmel,pmecc-cap = <2>; + atmel,pmecc-sector-size = <512>; + atmel,pmecc-lookup-table-offset = <0x8000 0x10000>; + gpios = <&pioD 5 0 /* rdy */ + &pioD 4 0 /* nce */ + 0 /* cd */ + >; + partition@0 { + ... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt index 1a5bbd3..3fb3f901 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt @@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-names : The interrupt names "gpmi-dma", "bch"; - fsl,gpmi-dma-channel : Should contain the dma channel it uses. +Optional properties: + - nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not + present false + The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the address space. See partition.txt for more detail. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0a3725 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +NXP LPC32xx SoC NAND MLC controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nxp,lpc3220-mlc" +- reg: Address and size of the controller +- interrupts: The NAND interrupt specification +- gpios: GPIO specification for NAND write protect + +The following required properties are very controller specific. See the LPC32xx +User Manual 7.5.14 MLC NAND Timing Register (the values here are specified in +Hz, to make them independent of actual clock speed and to provide for good +accuracy:) +- nxp,tcea_delay: TCEA_DELAY +- nxp,busy_delay: BUSY_DELAY +- nxp,nand_ta: NAND_TA +- nxp,rd_high: RD_HIGH +- nxp,rd_low: RD_LOW +- nxp,wr_high: WR_HIGH +- nxp,wr_low: WR_LOW + +Optional subnodes: +- Partitions, see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt + +Example: + + mlc: flash@200A8000 { + compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-mlc"; + reg = <0x200A8000 0x11000>; + interrupts = <11 0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + nxp,tcea-delay = <333333333>; + nxp,busy-delay = <10000000>; + nxp,nand-ta = <18181818>; + nxp,rd-high = <31250000>; + nxp,rd-low = <45454545>; + nxp,wr-high = <40000000>; + nxp,wr-low = <83333333>; + gpios = <&gpio 5 19 1>; /* GPO_P3 19, active low */ + + mtd0@00000000 { + label = "boot"; + reg = <0x00000000 0x00064000>; + read-only; + }; + + ... + + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d94edc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +NXP LPC32xx SoC NAND SLC controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nxp,lpc3220-slc" +- reg: Address and size of the controller +- nand-on-flash-bbt: Use bad block table on flash +- gpios: GPIO specification for NAND write protect + +The following required properties are very controller specific. See the LPC32xx +User Manual: +- nxp,wdr-clks: Delay before Ready signal is tested on write (W_RDY) +- nxp,rdr-clks: Delay before Ready signal is tested on read (R_RDY) +(The following values are specified in Hz, to make them independent of actual +clock speed:) +- nxp,wwidth: Write pulse width (W_WIDTH) +- nxp,whold: Write hold time (W_HOLD) +- nxp,wsetup: Write setup time (W_SETUP) +- nxp,rwidth: Read pulse width (R_WIDTH) +- nxp,rhold: Read hold time (R_HOLD) +- nxp,rsetup: Read setup time (R_SETUP) + +Optional subnodes: +- Partitions, see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt + +Example: + + slc: flash@20020000 { + compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-slc"; + reg = <0x20020000 0x1000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + nxp,wdr-clks = <14>; + nxp,wwidth = <40000000>; + nxp,whold = <100000000>; + nxp,wsetup = <100000000>; + nxp,rdr-clks = <14>; + nxp,rwidth = <40000000>; + nxp,rhold = <66666666>; + nxp,rsetup = <100000000>; + nand-on-flash-bbt; + gpios = <&gpio 5 19 1>; /* GPO_P3 19, active low */ + + mtd0@00000000 { + label = "phy3250-boot"; + reg = <0x00000000 0x00064000>; + read-only; + }; + + ... + + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt index a63c2bd7..94de19b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt @@ -16,6 +16,13 @@ file systems on embedded devices. - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes representing partitions (see below). In this case both #address-cells and #size-cells must be equal to 1. + - no-unaligned-direct-access: boolean to disable the default direct + mapping of the flash. + On some platforms (e.g. MPC5200) a direct 1:1 mapping may cause + problems with JFFS2 usage, as the local bus (LPB) doesn't support + unaligned accesses as implemented in the JFFS2 code via memcpy(). + By defining "no-unaligned-direct-access", the flash will not be + exposed directly to the MTD users (e.g. JFFS2) any more. For JEDEC compatible devices, the following additional properties are defined: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..daa7689 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +Lantiq FALCON pinmux controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lantiq,pinctrl-falcon" +- reg: Should contain the physical address and length of the gpio/pinmux + register range + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters: +pull-up and open-drain + +The name of each subnode is not important as long as it is unique; all subnodes +should be enumerated and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + +We support 2 types of nodes. + +Definition of mux function groups: + +Required subnode-properties: +- lantiq,groups : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a group. + Valid values for these names are listed below. +- lantiq,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the + group. Valid values for function names are listed below. + +Valid values for group and function names: + + mux groups: + por, ntr, ntr8k, hrst, mdio, bootled, asc0, spi, spi cs0, spi cs1, i2c, + jtag, slic, pcm, asc1 + + functions: + rst, ntr, mdio, led, asc, spi, i2c, jtag, slic, pcm + + +Definition of pin configurations: + +Required subnode-properties: +- lantiq,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin. + Valid values for these names are listed below. + +Optional subnode-properties: +- lantiq,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin. + 0: none, 1: down +- lantiq,drive-current: Boolean, enables drive-current +- lantiq,slew-rate: Boolean, enables slew-rate + +Example: + pinmux0 { + compatible = "lantiq,pinctrl-falcon"; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&state_default>; + + state_default: pinmux { + asc0 { + lantiq,groups = "asc0"; + lantiq,function = "asc"; + }; + ntr { + lantiq,groups = "ntr8k"; + lantiq,function = "ntr"; + }; + i2c { + lantiq,groups = "i2c"; + lantiq,function = "i2c"; + }; + hrst { + lantiq,groups = "hrst"; + lantiq,function = "rst"; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5469db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +Lantiq XWAY pinmux controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lantiq,pinctrl-xway" or "lantiq,pinctrl-xr9" +- reg: Should contain the physical address and length of the gpio/pinmux + register range + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters: +pull-up and open-drain + +The name of each subnode is not important as long as it is unique; all subnodes +should be enumerated and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + +We support 2 types of nodes. + +Definition of mux function groups: + +Required subnode-properties: +- lantiq,groups : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a group. + Valid values for these names are listed below. +- lantiq,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the + group. Valid values for function names are listed below. + +Valid values for group and function names: + + mux groups: + exin0, exin1, exin2, jtag, ebu a23, ebu a24, ebu a25, ebu clk, ebu cs1, + ebu wait, nand ale, nand cs1, nand cle, spi, spi_cs1, spi_cs2, spi_cs3, + spi_cs4, spi_cs5, spi_cs6, asc0, asc0 cts rts, stp, nmi , gpt1, gpt2, + gpt3, clkout0, clkout1, clkout2, clkout3, gnt1, gnt2, gnt3, req1, req2, + req3 + + additional mux groups (XR9 only): + mdio, nand rdy, nand rd, exin3, exin4, gnt4, req4 + + functions: + spi, asc, cgu, jtag, exin, stp, gpt, nmi, pci, ebu, mdio + + + +Definition of pin configurations: + +Required subnode-properties: +- lantiq,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin. + Valid values for these names are listed below. + +Optional subnode-properties: +- lantiq,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin. + 0: none, 1: down, 2: up. +- lantiq,open-drain: Boolean, enables open-drain on the defined pin. + +Valid values for XWAY pin names: + Pinconf pins can be referenced via the names io0-io31. + +Valid values for XR9 pin names: + Pinconf pins can be referenced via the names io0-io55. + +Example: + gpio: pinmux@E100B10 { + compatible = "lantiq,pinctrl-xway"; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&state_default>; + + #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-controller; + reg = <0xE100B10 0xA0>; + + state_default: pinmux { + stp { + lantiq,groups = "stp"; + lantiq,function = "stp"; + }; + pci { + lantiq,groups = "gnt1"; + lantiq,function = "pci"; + }; + conf_out { + lantiq,pins = "io4", "io5", "io6"; /* stp */ + lantiq,open-drain; + lantiq,pull = <0>; + }; + }; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01ef408 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +* Marvell Armada 370 SoC pinctrl driver for mpp + +Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding +part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,88f6710-pinctrl" + +Available mpp pins/groups and functions: +Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given +only for more detailed description in this document. + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, uart0(rxd) +mpp1 1 gpo, uart0(txd) +mpp2 2 gpio, i2c0(sck), uart0(txd) +mpp3 3 gpio, i2c0(sda), uart0(rxd) +mpp4 4 gpio, cpu_pd(vdd) +mpp5 5 gpo, ge0(txclko), uart1(txd), spi1(clk), audio(mclk) +mpp6 6 gpio, ge0(txd0), sata0(prsnt), tdm(rst), audio(sdo) +mpp7 7 gpo, ge0(txd1), tdm(tdx), audio(lrclk) +mpp8 8 gpio, ge0(txd2), uart0(rts), tdm(drx), audio(bclk) +mpp9 9 gpo, ge0(txd3), uart1(txd), sd0(clk), audio(spdifo) +mpp10 10 gpio, ge0(txctl), uart0(cts), tdm(fsync), audio(sdi) +mpp11 11 gpio, ge0(rxd0), uart1(rxd), sd0(cmd), spi0(cs1), + sata1(prsnt), spi1(cs1) +mpp12 12 gpio, ge0(rxd1), i2c1(sda), sd0(d0), spi1(cs0), + audio(spdifi) +mpp13 13 gpio, ge0(rxd2), i2c1(sck), sd0(d1), tdm(pclk), + audio(rmclk) +mpp14 14 gpio, ge0(rxd3), pcie(clkreq0), sd0(d2), spi1(mosi), + spi0(cs2) +mpp15 15 gpio, ge0(rxctl), pcie(clkreq1), sd0(d3), spi1(miso), + spi0(cs3) +mpp16 16 gpio, ge0(rxclk), uart1(rxd), tdm(int), audio(extclk) +mpp17 17 gpo, ge(mdc) +mpp18 18 gpio, ge(mdio) +mpp19 19 gpio, ge0(txclk), ge1(txclkout), tdm(pclk) +mpp20 20 gpo, ge0(txd4), ge1(txd0) +mpp21 21 gpo, ge0(txd5), ge1(txd1), uart1(txd) +mpp22 22 gpo, ge0(txd6), ge1(txd2), uart0(rts) +mpp23 23 gpo, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), spi1(mosi) +mpp24 24 gpio, ge0(col), ge1(txctl), spi1(cs0) +mpp25 25 gpio, ge0(rxerr), ge1(rxd0), uart1(rxd) +mpp26 26 gpio, ge0(crs), ge1(rxd1), spi1(miso) +mpp27 27 gpio, ge0(rxd4), ge1(rxd2), uart0(cts) +mpp28 28 gpio, ge0(rxd5), ge1(rxd3) +mpp29 29 gpio, ge0(rxd6), ge1(rxctl), i2c1(sda) +mpp30 30 gpio, ge0(rxd7), ge1(rxclk), i2c1(sck) +mpp31 31 gpio, tclk, ge0(txerr) +mpp32 32 gpio, spi0(cs0) +mpp33 33 gpio, dev(bootcs), spi0(cs0) +mpp34 34 gpo, dev(wen0), spi0(mosi) +mpp35 35 gpo, dev(oen), spi0(sck) +mpp36 36 gpo, dev(a1), spi0(miso) +mpp37 37 gpo, dev(a0), sata0(prsnt) +mpp38 38 gpio, dev(ready), uart1(cts), uart0(cts) +mpp39 39 gpo, dev(ad0), audio(spdifo) +mpp40 40 gpio, dev(ad1), uart1(rts), uart0(rts) +mpp41 41 gpio, dev(ad2), uart1(rxd) +mpp42 42 gpo, dev(ad3), uart1(txd) +mpp43 43 gpo, dev(ad4), audio(bclk) +mpp44 44 gpo, dev(ad5), audio(mclk) +mpp45 45 gpo, dev(ad6), audio(lrclk) +mpp46 46 gpo, dev(ad7), audio(sdo) +mpp47 47 gpo, dev(ad8), sd0(clk), audio(spdifo) +mpp48 48 gpio, dev(ad9), uart0(rts), sd0(cmd), sata1(prsnt), + spi0(cs1) +mpp49 49 gpio, dev(ad10), pcie(clkreq1), sd0(d0), spi1(cs0), + audio(spdifi) +mpp50 50 gpio, dev(ad11), uart0(cts), sd0(d1), spi1(miso), + audio(rmclk) +mpp51 51 gpio, dev(ad12), i2c1(sda), sd0(d2), spi1(mosi) +mpp52 52 gpio, dev(ad13), i2c1(sck), sd0(d3), spi1(sck) +mpp53 53 gpio, dev(ad14), sd0(clk), tdm(pclk), spi0(cs2), + pcie(clkreq1) +mpp54 54 gpo, dev(ad15), tdm(dtx) +mpp55 55 gpio, dev(cs1), uart1(txd), tdm(rst), sata1(prsnt), + sata0(prsnt) +mpp56 56 gpio, dev(cs2), uart1(cts), uart0(cts), spi0(cs3), + pcie(clkreq0), spi1(cs1) +mpp57 57 gpio, dev(cs3), uart1(rxd), tdm(fsync), sata0(prsnt), + audio(sdo) +mpp58 58 gpio, dev(cs0), uart1(rts), tdm(int), audio(extclk), + uart0(rts) +mpp59 59 gpo, dev(ale0), uart1(rts), uart0(rts), audio(bclk) +mpp60 60 gpio, dev(ale1), uart1(rxd), sata0(prsnt), pcie(rst-out), + audio(sdi) +mpp61 61 gpo, dev(wen1), uart1(txd), audio(rclk) +mpp62 62 gpio, dev(a2), uart1(cts), tdm(drx), pcie(clkreq0), + audio(mclk), uart0(cts) +mpp63 63 gpo, spi0(sck), tclk +mpp64 64 gpio, spi0(miso), spi0-1(cs1) +mpp65 65 gpio, spi0(mosi), spi0-1(cs2) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bfa0a2e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +* Marvell Armada XP SoC pinctrl driver for mpp + +Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding +part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,mv78230-pinctrl", "marvell,mv78260-pinctrl", + "marvell,mv78460-pinctrl" + +This driver supports all Armada XP variants, i.e. mv78230, mv78260, and mv78460. + +Available mpp pins/groups and functions: +Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given +only for more detailed description in this document. + +* Marvell Armada XP (all variants) + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, ge0(txclko), lcd(d0) +mpp1 1 gpio, ge0(txd0), lcd(d1) +mpp2 2 gpio, ge0(txd1), lcd(d2) +mpp3 3 gpio, ge0(txd2), lcd(d3) +mpp4 4 gpio, ge0(txd3), lcd(d4) +mpp5 5 gpio, ge0(txctl), lcd(d5) +mpp6 6 gpio, ge0(rxd0), lcd(d6) +mpp7 7 gpio, ge0(rxd1), lcd(d7) +mpp8 8 gpio, ge0(rxd2), lcd(d8) +mpp9 9 gpio, ge0(rxd3), lcd(d9) +mpp10 10 gpio, ge0(rxctl), lcd(d10) +mpp11 11 gpio, ge0(rxclk), lcd(d11) +mpp12 12 gpio, ge0(txd4), ge1(txd0), lcd(d12) +mpp13 13 gpio, ge0(txd5), ge1(txd1), lcd(d13) +mpp14 14 gpio, ge0(txd6), ge1(txd2), lcd(d15) +mpp15 15 gpio, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), lcd(d16) +mpp16 16 gpio, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), lcd(d16) +mpp17 17 gpio, ge0(col), ge1(txctl), lcd(d17) +mpp18 18 gpio, ge0(rxerr), ge1(rxd0), lcd(d18), ptp(trig) +mpp19 19 gpio, ge0(crs), ge1(rxd1), lcd(d19), ptp(evreq) +mpp20 20 gpio, ge0(rxd4), ge1(rxd2), lcd(d20), ptp(clk) +mpp21 21 gpio, ge0(rxd5), ge1(rxd3), lcd(d21), mem(bat) +mpp22 22 gpio, ge0(rxd6), ge1(rxctl), lcd(d22), sata0(prsnt) +mpp23 23 gpio, ge0(rxd7), ge1(rxclk), lcd(d23), sata1(prsnt) +mpp24 24 gpio, lcd(hsync), sata1(prsnt), nf(bootcs-re), tdm(rst) +mpp25 25 gpio, lcd(vsync), sata0(prsnt), nf(bootcs-we), tdm(pclk) +mpp26 26 gpio, lcd(clk), tdm(fsync), vdd(cpu1-pd) +mpp27 27 gpio, lcd(e), tdm(dtx), ptp(trig) +mpp28 28 gpio, lcd(pwm), tdm(drx), ptp(evreq) +mpp29 29 gpio, lcd(ref-clk), tdm(int0), ptp(clk), vdd(cpu0-pd) +mpp30 30 gpio, tdm(int1), sd0(clk) +mpp31 31 gpio, tdm(int2), sd0(cmd), vdd(cpu0-pd) +mpp32 32 gpio, tdm(int3), sd0(d0), vdd(cpu1-pd) +mpp33 33 gpio, tdm(int4), sd0(d1), mem(bat) +mpp34 34 gpio, tdm(int5), sd0(d2), sata0(prsnt) +mpp35 35 gpio, tdm(int6), sd0(d3), sata1(prsnt) +mpp36 36 gpio, spi(mosi) +mpp37 37 gpio, spi(miso) +mpp38 38 gpio, spi(sck) +mpp39 39 gpio, spi(cs0) +mpp40 40 gpio, spi(cs1), uart2(cts), lcd(vga-hsync), vdd(cpu1-pd), + pcie(clkreq0) +mpp41 41 gpio, spi(cs2), uart2(rts), lcd(vga-vsync), sata1(prsnt), + pcie(clkreq1) +mpp42 42 gpio, uart2(rxd), uart0(cts), tdm(int7), tdm-1(timer), + vdd(cpu0-pd) +mpp43 43 gpio, uart2(txd), uart0(rts), spi(cs3), pcie(rstout), + vdd(cpu2-3-pd){1} +mpp44 44 gpio, uart2(cts), uart3(rxd), spi(cs4), pcie(clkreq2), + mem(bat) +mpp45 45 gpio, uart2(rts), uart3(txd), spi(cs5), sata1(prsnt) +mpp46 46 gpio, uart3(rts), uart1(rts), spi(cs6), sata0(prsnt) +mpp47 47 gpio, uart3(cts), uart1(cts), spi(cs7), pcie(clkreq3), + ref(clkout) +mpp48 48 gpio, tclk, dev(burst/last) + +* Marvell Armada XP (mv78260 and mv78460 only) + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp49 49 gpio, dev(we3) +mpp50 50 gpio, dev(we2) +mpp51 51 gpio, dev(ad16) +mpp52 52 gpio, dev(ad17) +mpp53 53 gpio, dev(ad18) +mpp54 54 gpio, dev(ad19) +mpp55 55 gpio, dev(ad20), vdd(cpu0-pd) +mpp56 56 gpio, dev(ad21), vdd(cpu1-pd) +mpp57 57 gpio, dev(ad22), vdd(cpu2-3-pd){1} +mpp58 58 gpio, dev(ad23) +mpp59 59 gpio, dev(ad24) +mpp60 60 gpio, dev(ad25) +mpp61 61 gpio, dev(ad26) +mpp62 62 gpio, dev(ad27) +mpp63 63 gpio, dev(ad28) +mpp64 64 gpio, dev(ad29) +mpp65 65 gpio, dev(ad30) +mpp66 66 gpio, dev(ad31) + +Notes: +* {1} vdd(cpu2-3-pd) only available on mv78460. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a648aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +* Marvell Dove SoC pinctrl driver for mpp + +Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding +part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,dove-pinctrl" +- clocks: (optional) phandle of pdma clock + +Available mpp pins/groups and functions: +Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given +only for more detailed description in this document. + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, pmu, uart2(rts), sdio0(cd), lcd0(pwm) +mpp1 1 gpio, pmu, uart2(cts), sdio0(wp), lcd1(pwm) +mpp2 2 gpio, pmu, uart2(txd), sdio0(buspwr), sata(prsnt), + uart1(rts) +mpp3 3 gpio, pmu, uart2(rxd), sdio0(ledctrl), sata(act), + uart1(cts), lcd-spi(cs1) +mpp4 4 gpio, pmu, uart3(rts), sdio1(cd), spi1(miso) +mpp5 5 gpio, pmu, uart3(cts), sdio1(wp), spi1(cs) +mpp6 6 gpio, pmu, uart3(txd), sdio1(buspwr), spi1(mosi) +mpp7 7 gpio, pmu, uart3(rxd), sdio1(ledctrl), spi1(sck) +mpp8 8 gpio, pmu, watchdog(rstout) +mpp9 9 gpio, pmu, pex1(clkreq) +mpp10 10 gpio, pmu, ssp(sclk) +mpp11 11 gpio, pmu, sata(prsnt), sata-1(act), sdio0(ledctrl), + sdio1(ledctrl), pex0(clkreq) +mpp12 12 gpio, pmu, uart2(rts), audio0(extclk), sdio1(cd), sata(act) +mpp13 13 gpio, pmu, uart2(cts), audio1(extclk), sdio1(wp), + ssp(extclk) +mpp14 14 gpio, pmu, uart2(txd), sdio1(buspwr), ssp(rxd) +mpp15 15 gpio, pmu, uart2(rxd), sdio1(ledctrl), ssp(sfrm) +mpp16 16 gpio, uart3(rts), sdio0(cd), ac97(sdi1), lcd-spi(cs1) +mpp17 17 gpio, uart3(cts), sdio0(wp), ac97(sdi2), twsi(sda), + ac97-1(sysclko) +mpp18 18 gpio, uart3(txd), sdio0(buspwr), ac97(sdi3), lcd0(pwm) +mpp19 19 gpio, uart3(rxd), sdio0(ledctrl), twsi(sck) +mpp20 20 gpio, sdio0(cd), sdio1(cd), spi1(miso), lcd-spi(miso), + ac97(sysclko) +mpp21 21 gpio, sdio0(wp), sdio1(wp), spi1(cs), lcd-spi(cs0), + uart1(cts), ssp(sfrm) +mpp22 22 gpio, sdio0(buspwr), sdio1(buspwr), spi1(mosi), + lcd-spi(mosi), uart1(cts), ssp(txd) +mpp23 23 gpio, sdio0(ledctrl), sdio1(ledctrl), spi1(sck), + lcd-spi(sck), ssp(sclk) +mpp_camera 24-39 gpio, camera +mpp_sdio0 40-45 gpio, sdio0 +mpp_sdio1 46-51 gpio, sdio1 +mpp_audio1 52-57 gpio, i2s1/spdifo, i2s1, spdifo, twsi, ssp/spdifo, ssp, + ssp/twsi +mpp_spi0 58-61 gpio, spi0 +mpp_uart1 62-63 gpio, uart1 +mpp_nand 64-71 gpo, nand +audio0 - i2s, ac97 +twsi - none, opt1, opt2, opt3 + +Notes: +* group "mpp_audio1" allows the following functions and gpio pins: + - gpio : gpio on pins 52-57 + - i2s1/spdifo : audio1 i2s on pins 52-55 and spdifo on 57, no gpios + - i2s1 : audio1 i2s on pins 52-55, gpio on pins 56,57 + - spdifo : spdifo on pin 57, gpio on pins 52-55 + - twsi : twsi on pins 56,57, gpio on pins 52-55 + - ssp/spdifo : ssp on pins 52-55, spdifo on pin 57, no gpios + - ssp : ssp on pins 52-55, gpio on pins 56,57 + - ssp/twsi : ssp on pins 52-55, twsi on pins 56,57, no gpios +* group "audio0" internally muxes i2s0 or ac97 controller to the dedicated + audio0 pins. +* group "twsi" internally muxes twsi controller to the dedicated or option pins. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..361bccb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,279 @@ +* Marvell Kirkwood SoC pinctrl driver for mpp + +Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding +part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,88f6180-pinctrl", + "marvell,88f6190-pinctrl", "marvell,88f6192-pinctrl", + "marvell,88f6281-pinctrl", "marvell,88f6282-pinctrl" + +This driver supports all kirkwood variants, i.e. 88f6180, 88f619x, and 88f628x. + +Available mpp pins/groups and functions: +Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given +only for more detailed description in this document. + +* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6180 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs) +mpp1 1 gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi) +mpp2 2 gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck) +mpp3 3 gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso) +mpp4 4 gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk) +mpp5 5 gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig) +mpp6 6 sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig) +mpp7 7 gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig) +mpp8 8 gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk), + mii(col) +mpp9 9 gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq), + mii(crs) +mpp10 10 gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig) +mpp11 11 gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq), + ptp-2(trig) +mpp12 12 gpo, sdio(clk) +mpp13 13 gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd) +mpp14 14 gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col) +mpp15 15 gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd) +mpp16 16 gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs) +mpp17 17 gpio, sdio(d3) +mpp18 18 gpo, nand(io0) +mpp19 19 gpo, nand(io1) +mpp20 20 gpio, mii(rxerr) +mpp21 21 gpio, audio(spdifi) +mpp22 22 gpio, audio(spdifo) +mpp23 23 gpio, audio(rmclk) +mpp24 24 gpio, audio(bclk) +mpp25 25 gpio, audio(sdo) +mpp26 26 gpio, audio(lrclk) +mpp27 27 gpio, audio(mclk) +mpp28 28 gpio, audio(sdi) +mpp29 29 gpio, audio(extclk) + +* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6190 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs) +mpp1 1 gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi) +mpp2 2 gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck) +mpp3 3 gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso) +mpp4 4 gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk) +mpp5 5 gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act) +mpp6 6 sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig) +mpp7 7 gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig) +mpp8 8 gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk), + mii(col), mii-1(rxerr) +mpp9 9 gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq), + mii(crs), sata0(prsnt) +mpp10 10 gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig) +mpp11 11 gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq), + ptp-2(trig), sata0(act) +mpp12 12 gpo, sdio(clk) +mpp13 13 gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd) +mpp14 14 gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col) +mpp15 15 gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act) +mpp16 16 gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs) +mpp17 17 gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt) +mpp18 18 gpo, nand(io0) +mpp19 19 gpo, nand(io1) +mpp20 20 gpio, ge1(txd0) +mpp21 21 gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act) +mpp22 22 gpio, ge1(txd2) +mpp23 23 gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt) +mpp24 24 gpio, ge1(rxd0) +mpp25 25 gpio, ge1(rxd1) +mpp26 26 gpio, ge1(rxd2) +mpp27 27 gpio, ge1(rxd3) +mpp28 28 gpio, ge1(col) +mpp29 29 gpio, ge1(txclk) +mpp30 30 gpio, ge1(rxclk) +mpp31 31 gpio, ge1(rxclk) +mpp32 32 gpio, ge1(txclko) +mpp33 33 gpo, ge1(txclk) +mpp34 34 gpio, ge1(txen) +mpp35 35 gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr) + +* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6192 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs) +mpp1 1 gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi) +mpp2 2 gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck) +mpp3 3 gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso) +mpp4 4 gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), sata1(act) +mpp5 5 gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act) +mpp6 6 sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig) +mpp7 7 gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig) +mpp8 8 gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk), + mii(col), mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt) +mpp9 9 gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq), + mii(crs), sata0(prsnt) +mpp10 10 gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata1(act) +mpp11 11 gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq), + ptp-2(trig), sata0(act) +mpp12 12 gpo, sdio(clk) +mpp13 13 gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd) +mpp14 14 gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt) +mpp15 15 gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act) +mpp16 16 gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs), + sata1(act) +mpp17 17 gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt) +mpp18 18 gpo, nand(io0) +mpp19 19 gpo, nand(io1) +mpp20 20 gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi), + sata1(act) +mpp21 21 gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql), + audio(spdifo) +mpp22 22 gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk), + sata1(prsnt) +mpp23 23 gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql), + audio(bclk) +mpp24 24 gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo) +mpp25 25 gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk) +mpp26 26 gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk) +mpp27 27 gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi) +mpp28 28 gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk) +mpp29 29 gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst) +mpp30 30 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk) +mpp31 31 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs) +mpp32 32 gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx) +mpp33 33 gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx) +mpp34 34 gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1) +mpp35 35 gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql) + +* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6281 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs) +mpp1 1 gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi) +mpp2 2 gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck) +mpp3 3 gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso) +mpp4 4 gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), sata1(act) +mpp5 5 gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act) +mpp6 6 sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig) +mpp7 7 gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig) +mpp8 8 gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk), + mii(col), mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt) +mpp9 9 gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq), + mii(crs), sata0(prsnt) +mpp10 10 gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata1(act) +mpp11 11 gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq), + ptp-2(trig), sata0(act) +mpp12 12 gpio, sdio(clk) +mpp13 13 gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd) +mpp14 14 gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt) +mpp15 15 gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act) +mpp16 16 gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs), + sata1(act) +mpp17 17 gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt) +mpp18 18 gpo, nand(io0) +mpp19 19 gpo, nand(io1) +mpp20 20 gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi), + sata1(act) +mpp21 21 gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql), + audio(spdifo) +mpp22 22 gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk), + sata1(prsnt) +mpp23 23 gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql), + audio(bclk) +mpp24 24 gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo) +mpp25 25 gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk) +mpp26 26 gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk) +mpp27 27 gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi) +mpp28 28 gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk) +mpp29 29 gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst) +mpp30 30 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk) +mpp31 31 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs) +mpp32 32 gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx) +mpp33 33 gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx) +mpp34 34 gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1), sata1(act) +mpp35 35 gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql) +mpp36 36 gpio, ts(mp0), tdm(spi-cs1), audio(spdifi) +mpp37 37 gpio, ts(mp1), tdm(tx2ql), audio(spdifo) +mpp38 38 gpio, ts(mp2), tdm(rx2ql), audio(rmclk) +mpp39 39 gpio, ts(mp3), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(bclk) +mpp40 40 gpio, ts(mp4), tdm(spi-sck), audio(sdo) +mpp41 41 gpio, ts(mp5), tdm(spi-miso), audio(lrclk) +mpp42 42 gpio, ts(mp6), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(mclk) +mpp43 43 gpio, ts(mp7), tdm(int), audio(sdi) +mpp44 44 gpio, ts(mp8), tdm(rst), audio(extclk) +mpp45 45 gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(pclk) +mpp46 46 gpio, ts(mp10), tdm(fs) +mpp47 47 gpio, ts(mp11), tdm(drx) +mpp48 48 gpio, ts(mp12), tdm(dtx) +mpp49 49 gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(rx0ql), ptp(clk) + +* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6282 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs) +mpp1 1 gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi) +mpp2 2 gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck) +mpp3 3 gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso) +mpp4 4 gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), sata1(act), lcd(hsync) +mpp5 5 gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), sata0(act), lcd(vsync) +mpp6 6 sysrst(out), spi(mosi) +mpp7 7 gpo, spi(cs), lcd(pwm) +mpp8 8 gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), mii(col), + mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt) +mpp9 9 gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), mii(crs), + sata0(prsnt) +mpp10 10 gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), sata1(act) +mpp11 11 gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), sata0(act) +mpp12 12 gpo, sdio(clk), audio(spdifo), spi(mosi), twsi(sda) +mpp13 13 gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd), audio(rmclk), lcd(pwm) +mpp14 14 gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt), + audio(spdifi), audio-1(sdi) +mpp15 15 gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act), + spi(cs) +mpp16 16 gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs), + sata1(act), lcd(extclk) +mpp17 17 gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt), sata1(act), twsi1(sck) +mpp18 18 gpo, nand(io0), pex(clkreq) +mpp19 19 gpo, nand(io1) +mpp20 20 gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi), + sata1(act), lcd(d0) +mpp21 21 gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql), + audio(spdifo), lcd(d1) +mpp22 22 gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk), + sata1(prsnt), lcd(d2) +mpp23 23 gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql), + audio(bclk), lcd(d3) +mpp24 24 gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo), + lcd(d4) +mpp25 25 gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk), + lcd(d5) +mpp26 26 gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk), + lcd(d6) +mpp27 27 gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi), + lcd(d7) +mpp28 28 gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk), + lcd(d8) +mpp29 29 gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst), lcd(d9) +mpp30 30 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk), lcd(d10) +mpp31 31 gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs), lcd(d11) +mpp32 32 gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx), lcd(d12) +mpp33 33 gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx), lcd(d13) +mpp34 34 gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1), sata1(act), lcd(d14) +mpp35 35 gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql), + lcd(d15) +mpp36 36 gpio, ts(mp0), tdm(spi-cs1), audio(spdifi), twsi1(sda) +mpp37 37 gpio, ts(mp1), tdm(tx2ql), audio(spdifo), twsi1(sck) +mpp38 38 gpio, ts(mp2), tdm(rx2ql), audio(rmclk), lcd(d18) +mpp39 39 gpio, ts(mp3), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(bclk), lcd(d19) +mpp40 40 gpio, ts(mp4), tdm(spi-sck), audio(sdo), lcd(d20) +mpp41 41 gpio, ts(mp5), tdm(spi-miso), audio(lrclk), lcd(d21) +mpp42 42 gpio, ts(mp6), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(mclk), lcd(d22) +mpp43 43 gpio, ts(mp7), tdm(int), audio(sdi), lcd(d23) +mpp44 44 gpio, ts(mp8), tdm(rst), audio(extclk), lcd(clk) +mpp45 45 gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(pclk), lcd(e) +mpp46 46 gpio, ts(mp10), tdm(fs), lcd(hsync) +mpp47 47 gpio, ts(mp11), tdm(drx), lcd(vsync) +mpp48 48 gpio, ts(mp12), tdm(dtx), lcd(d16) +mpp49 49 gpo, tdm(rx0ql), pex(clkreq), lcd(d17) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a26c3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +* Marvell SoC pinctrl core driver for mpp + +The pinctrl driver enables Marvell SoCs to configure the multi-purpose pins +(mpp) to a specific function. For each SoC family there is a SoC specific +driver using this core driver. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +A Marvell SoC pin configuration node is a node of a group of pins which can +be used for a specific device or function. Each node requires one or more +mpp pins or group of pins and a mpp function common to all pins. + +Required properties for pinctrl driver: +- compatible: "marvell,<soc>-pinctrl" + Please refer to each marvell,<soc>-pinctrl.txt binding doc for supported SoCs. + +Required properties for pin configuration node: +- marvell,pins: string array of mpp pins or group of pins to be muxed. +- marvell,function: string representing a function to mux to for all + marvell,pins given in this pin configuration node. The function has to be + common for all marvell,pins. Please refer to marvell,<soc>-pinctrl.txt for + valid pin/pin group names and available function names for each SoC. + +Examples: + +uart1: serial@12100 { + compatible = "ns16550a"; + reg = <0x12100 0x100>; + reg-shift = <2>; + interrupts = <7>; + + pinctrl-0 = <&pmx_uart1_sw>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; +}; + +pinctrl: pinctrl@d0200 { + compatible = "marvell,dove-pinctrl"; + reg = <0xd0200 0x20>; + + pmx_uart1_sw: pmx-uart1-sw { + marvell,pins = "mpp_uart1"; + marvell,function = "uart1"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt index 939a26d..d5e3704 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt @@ -12,9 +12,12 @@ Properties: - #size-cells : Either one or two, depending on how large each chipselect can be. - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device -- interrupts : IFC has two interrupts. The first one is the "common" - interrupt(CM_EVTER_STAT), and second is the NAND interrupt - (NAND_EVTER_STAT). +- interrupts: IFC may have one or two interrupts. If two interrupt + specifiers are present, the first is the "common" + interrupt (CM_EVTER_STAT), and the second is the NAND + interrupt (NAND_EVTER_STAT). If there is only one, + that interrupt reports both types of event. + - ranges : Each range corresponds to a single chipselect, and covers the entire access window as configured. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8522bfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Freescale i.MX PWM controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "fsl,<soc>-pwm" +- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers +- #pwm-cells: should be 2. The first cell specifies the per-chip index + of the PWM to use and the second cell is the period in nanoseconds. +- interrupts: The interrupt for the pwm controller + +Example: + +pwm1: pwm@53fb4000 { + #pwm-cells = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,imx53-pwm", "fsl,imx27-pwm"; + reg = <0x53fb4000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <61>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt index b16f4a5..9e3f8f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt @@ -4,14 +4,14 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be "fsl,imx23-pwm" - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers - #pwm-cells: should be 2. The first cell specifies the per-chip index - of the PWM to use and the second cell is the duty cycle in nanoseconds. + of the PWM to use and the second cell is the period in nanoseconds. - fsl,pwm-number: the number of PWM devices Example: pwm: pwm@80064000 { compatible = "fsl,imx28-pwm", "fsl,imx23-pwm"; - reg = <0x80064000 2000>; + reg = <0x80064000 0x2000>; #pwm-cells = <2>; fsl,pwm-number = <8>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt index bbbeedb..01438ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers - #pwm-cells: On Tegra the number of cells used to specify a PWM is 2. The first cell specifies the per-chip index of the PWM to use and the second - cell is the duty cycle in nanoseconds. + cell is the period in nanoseconds. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1267b3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Marvell 88PM860x regulator + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,88pm860x" +- reg: I2C slave address +- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the + device. Each sub-node is identified using the regulator-compatible + property, with valid values listed below. + +Example: + + pmic: 88pm860x@34 { + compatible = "marvell,88pm860x"; + reg = <0x34>; + + regulators { + BUCK1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + BUCK3 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..371eccd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +MAX8907 regulator + +Required properties: +- compatible: "maxim,max8907" +- reg: I2C slave address +- interrupts: The interrupt output of the controller +- mbatt-supply: The input supply for MBATT, BBAT, SDBY, VRTC. +- in-v1-supply: The input supply for SD1. +- in-v2-supply: The input supply for SD2. +- in-v3-supply: The input supply for SD3. +- in1-supply: The input supply for LDO1. +... +- in20-supply: The input supply for LDO20. +- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the + device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name (or the deprecated + regulator-compatible property if present), with valid values listed below. + The content of each sub-node is defined by the standard binding for + regulators; see regulator.txt. + +Optional properties: +- maxim,system-power-controller: Boolean property indicating that the PMIC + controls the overall system power. + +The valid names for regulators are: + + sd1, sd2, sd3, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5, ldo6, ldo7, ldo8, ldo9, ldo10, + ldo11, ldo12, ldo13, ldo14, ldo15, ldo16, ldo17, ldo18, ldo19, ldo20, out5v, + out33v, bbat, sdby, vrtc. + +Example: + + max8907@3c { + compatible = "maxim,max8907"; + reg = <0x3c>; + interrupts = <0 86 0x4>; + + maxim,system-power-controller; + + mbatt-supply = <&some_reg>; + in-v1-supply = <&mbatt_reg>; + ... + in1-supply = <&mbatt_reg>; + ... + + regulators { + mbatt_reg: mbatt { + regulator-name = "vbat_pmu"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <5000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <5000000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd1 { + regulator-name = "nvvdd_sv1,vdd_cpu_pmu"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd2 { + regulator-name = "nvvdd_sv2,vdd_core"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; +... + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt index 07b9ef6..8b40cac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt @@ -22,6 +22,10 @@ Required properties: - vinldo678-supply: The input supply for the LDO6, LDO7 and LDO8 - vinldo9-supply: The input supply for the LDO9 +Optional properties: +- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling + the system power. + Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators. Note: LDO5 and LDO_RTC is supplied by SYS regulator internally and driver @@ -37,6 +41,8 @@ Example: #gpio-cells = <2>; gpio-controller; + ti,system-power-controller; + sys-supply = <&some_reg>; vin-sm0-supply = <&some_reg>; vin-sm1-supply = <&some_reg>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb61ed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt for details. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c58573b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +* Freescale i.MX UART controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "fsl,imx21-uart" +- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : Should contain UART interrupt number + +Optional properties: +- fsl,uart-has-rtscts: indicate that RTS/CTS signals are used + +Note: Each uart controller should have an alias correctly numbered +in "aliases" node. + +Example: + +- From imx51.dtsi: +aliases { + serial0 = &uart1; + serial1 = &uart2; + serial2 = &uart3; +}; + +uart1: serial@73fbc000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx51-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart"; + reg = <0x73fbc000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <31>; + status = "disabled"; +} + +- From imx51-babbage.dts: +uart1: serial@73fbc000 { + fsl,uart-has-rtscts; + status = "okay"; +}; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b222f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +CS4270 audio CODEC + +The driver for this device currently only supports I2C. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "cirrus,cs4270" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C + +Optional properties: + + - reset-gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be + deasserted before communication to the codec starts. + +Example: + +codec: cs4270@48 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs4270"; + reg = <0x48>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c81b5fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Cirrus Logic CS4271 DT bindings + +This driver supports both the I2C and the SPI bus. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: "cirrus,cs4271" + +For required properties on SPI, please consult +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Required properties on I2C: + + - reg: the i2c address + + +Optional properties: + + - reset-gpio: a GPIO spec to define which pin is connected to the chip's + !RESET pin + +Examples: + + codec_i2c: cs4271@10 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs4271"; + reg = <0x10>; + reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>; + }; + + codec_spi: cs4271@0 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs4271"; + reg = <0x0>; + reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>; + spi-max-frequency = <6000000>; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..374e145 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Texas Instruments McASP controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : + "ti,dm646x-mcasp-audio" : for DM646x platforms + "ti,da830-mcasp-audio" : for both DA830 & DA850 platforms + "ti,omap2-mcasp-audio" : for OMAP2 platforms (TI81xx, AM33xx) + +- reg : Should contain McASP registers offset and length +- interrupts : Interrupt number for McASP +- op-mode : I2S/DIT ops mode. +- tdm-slots : Slots for TDM operation. +- num-serializer : Serializers used by McASP. +- serial-dir : A list of serializer pin mode. The list number should be equal + to "num-serializer" parameter. Each entry is a number indication + serializer pin direction. (0 - INACTIVE, 1 - TX, 2 - RX) + + +Optional properties: + +- ti,hwmods : Must be "mcasp<n>", n is controller instance starting 0 +- tx-num-evt : FIFO levels. +- rx-num-evt : FIFO levels. +- sram-size-playback : size of sram to be allocated during playback +- sram-size-capture : size of sram to be allocated during capture + +Example: + +mcasp0: mcasp0@1d00000 { + compatible = "ti,da830-mcasp-audio"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x100000 0x3000>; + interrupts = <82 83>; + op-mode = <0>; /* MCASP_IIS_MODE */ + tdm-slots = <2>; + num-serializer = <16>; + serial-dir = < + 0 0 0 0 /* 0: INACTIVE, 1: TX, 2: RX */ + 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 0 1 + 2 0 0 0 >; + tx-num-evt = <1>; + rx-num-evt = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..65dec87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +* Texas Instruments OMAP4+ and twl6040 based audio setups + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,abe-twl6040" +- ti,model: Name of the sound card ( for example "SDP4430") +- ti,mclk-freq: MCLK frequency for HPPLL operation +- ti,mcpdm: phandle for the McPDM node +- ti,twl6040: phandle for the twl6040 core node +- ti,audio-routing: List of connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, + the second being the connection's source. + +Optional properties: +- ti,dmic: phandle for the OMAP dmic node if the machine have it connected +- ti,jack_detection: Need to be set to <1> if the board capable to detect jack + insertion, removal. + +Available audio endpoints for the audio-routing table: + +Board connectors: + * Headset Stereophone + * Earphone Spk + * Ext Spk + * Line Out + * Vibrator + * Headset Mic + * Main Handset Mic + * Sub Handset Mic + * Line In + * Digital Mic + +twl6040 pins: + * HSOL + * HSOR + * EP + * HFL + * HFR + * AUXL + * AUXR + * VIBRAL + * VIBRAR + * HSMIC + * MAINMIC + * SUBMIC + * AFML + * AFMR + + * Headset Mic Bias + * Main Mic Bias + * Digital Mic1 Bias + * Digital Mic2 Bias + +Digital mic pins: + * DMic + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "ti,abe-twl6040"; + ti,model = "SDP4430"; + + ti,jack-detection = <1>; + ti,mclk-freq = <38400000>; + + ti,mcpdm = <&mcpdm>; + ti,dmic = <&dmic>; + + ti,twl6040 = <&twl6040>; + + /* Audio routing */ + ti,audio-routing = + "Headset Stereophone", "HSOL", + "Headset Stereophone", "HSOR", + "Earphone Spk", "EP", + "Ext Spk", "HFL", + "Ext Spk", "HFR", + "Line Out", "AUXL", + "Line Out", "AUXR", + "Vibrator", "VIBRAL", + "Vibrator", "VIBRAR", + "HSMIC", "Headset Mic", + "Headset Mic", "Headset Mic Bias", + "MAINMIC", "Main Handset Mic", + "Main Handset Mic", "Main Mic Bias", + "SUBMIC", "Sub Handset Mic", + "Sub Handset Mic", "Main Mic Bias", + "AFML", "Line In", + "AFMR", "Line In", + "DMic", "Digital Mic", + "Digital Mic", "Digital Mic1 Bias"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17cce44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +* Texas Instruments OMAP2+ McBSP module + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap2420-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP2420 + "ti,omap2430-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP2430 + "ti,omap3-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP3 + "ti,omap4-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP4 and newer SoC +- reg: Register location and size, for OMAP4+ as an array: + <MPU access base address, size>, + <L3 interconnect address, size>; +- reg-names: Array of strings associated with the address space +- interrupts: Interrupt numbers for the McBSP port, as an array in case the + McBSP IP have more interrupt lines: + <OCP compliant irq>, + <TX irq>, + <RX irq>; +- interrupt-names: Array of strings associated with the interrupt numbers +- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller +- ti,buffer-size: Size of the FIFO on the port (OMAP2430 and newer SoC) +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McBSP port + +Example: + +mcbsp2: mcbsp@49022000 { + compatible = "ti,omap3-mcbsp"; + reg = <0x49022000 0xff>, + <0x49028000 0xff>; + reg-names = "mpu", "sidetone"; + interrupts = <0 17 0x4>, /* OCP compliant interrupt */ + <0 62 0x4>, /* TX interrupt */ + <0 63 0x4>, /* RX interrupt */ + <0 4 0x4>; /* Sidetone */ + interrupt-names = "common", "tx", "rx", "sidetone"; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + ti,buffer-size = <1280>; + ti,hwmods = "mcbsp2"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6fae51c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* Texas Instruments SoC with twl4030 based audio setups + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap-twl4030" +- ti,model: Name of the sound card (for example "omap3beagle") +- ti,mcbsp: phandle for the McBSP node +- ti,codec: phandle for the twl4030 audio node + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "ti,omap-twl4030"; + ti,model = "omap3beagle"; + + ti,mcbsp = <&mcbsp2>; + ti,codec = <&twl_audio>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7b98f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Texas Instruments - tlv320aic3x Codec module + +The tlv320aic3x serial control bus communicates through I2C protocols + +Required properties: +- compatible - "string" - "ti,tlv320aic3x" +- reg - <int> - I2C slave address + + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reset - gpio pin number used for codec reset +- ai3x-gpio-func - <array of 2 int> - AIC3X_GPIO1 & AIC3X_GPIO2 Functionality + +Example: + +tlv320aic3x: tlv320aic3x@1b { + compatible = "ti,tlv320aic3x"; + reg = <0x1b>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..431add1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +Cavium, Inc. OCTEON SOC SPI master controller. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "cavium,octeon-3010-spi" +- reg : The register base for the controller. +- interrupts : One interrupt, used by the controller. +- #address-cells : <1>, as required by generic SPI binding. +- #size-cells : <0>, also as required by generic SPI binding. + +Child nodes as per the generic SPI binding. + +Example: + + spi@1070000001000 { + compatible = "cavium,octeon-3010-spi"; + reg = <0x10700 0x00001000 0x0 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 58>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + eeprom@0 { + compatible = "st,m95256", "atmel,at25"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <5000000>; + spi-cpha; + spi-cpol; + + pagesize = <64>; + size = <32768>; + address-width = <16>; + }; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt index 2de21c2..844bd5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ free running counter values, and generates an interrupt. Required properties: -- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt" +- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-system-timer" - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. - interrupts : A list of 4 interrupt sinks; one per timer channel. - clock-frequency : The frequency of the clock that drives the counter, in Hz. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..261df27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +88pm860x-backlight bindings + +Optional properties: + - marvell,88pm860x-iset: Current supplies on backlight device. + - marvell,88pm860x-pwm: PWM frequency on backlight device. + +Example: + + backlights { + backlight-0 { + marvell,88pm860x-iset = <4>; + marvell,88pm860x-pwm = <3>; + }; + backlight-2 { + }; diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index 950856b..43cff70 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -284,3 +284,7 @@ CLOCK PINCTRL devm_pinctrl_get() devm_pinctrl_put() + +PWM + devm_pwm_get() + devm_pwm_put() diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb index c4d963a6..8eb9226 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb +++ b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ with the device via the bus. The connection between the DVB-API-functionality is done via callbacks, assigned in a static device-description (struct dvb_usb_device) each device-driver has to have. -For an example have a look in drivers/media/dvb/dvb-usb/vp7045*. +For an example have a look in drivers/media/usb/dvb-usb/vp7045*. Objective is to migrate all the usb-devices (dibusb, cinergyT2, maybe the ttusb; flexcop-usb already benefits from the generic flexcop-device) to use diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 12d3952e..32bc56b 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ sub tda10045 { sub tda10046 { my $sourcefile = "TT_PCI_2.19h_28_11_2006.zip"; - my $url = "http://www.tt-download.com/download/updates/219/$sourcefile"; + my $url = "http://technotrend.com.ua/download/software/219/$sourcefile"; my $hash = "6a7e1e2f2644b162ff0502367553c72d"; my $outfile = "dvb-fe-tda10046.fw"; my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 1b7f9ac..104322b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -375,6 +375,16 @@ dioread_nolock locking. If the dioread_nolock option is specified Because of the restrictions this options comprises it is off by default (e.g. dioread_lock). +max_dir_size_kb=n This limits the size of directories so that any + attempt to expand them beyond the specified + limit in kilobytes will cause an ENOSPC error. + This is useful in memory constrained + environments, where a very large directory can + cause severe performance problems or even + provoke the Out Of Memory killer. (For example, + if there is only 512mb memory available, a 176mb + directory may seriously cramp the system's style.) + i_version Enable 64-bit inode version support. This option is off by default. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt index 26ebde7..f743335 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ IBM's Journaled File System (JFS) for Linux JFS Homepage: http://jfs.sourceforge.net/ The following mount options are supported: +(*) == default iocharset=name Character set to use for converting from Unicode to ASCII. The default is to do no conversion. Use @@ -21,12 +22,12 @@ nointegrity Do not write to the journal. The primary use of this option from backup media. The integrity of the volume is not guaranteed if the system abnormally abends. -integrity Default. Commit metadata changes to the journal. Use this - option to remount a volume where the nointegrity option was +integrity(*) Commit metadata changes to the journal. Use this option to + remount a volume where the nointegrity option was previously specified in order to restore normal behavior. errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. -errors=remount-ro Default. Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. +errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. uid=value Override on-disk uid with specified value @@ -35,7 +36,17 @@ umask=value Override on-disk umask with specified octal value. For directories, the execute bit will be set if the corresponding read bit is set. -Please send bugs, comments, cards and letters to shaggy@linux.vnet.ibm.com. +discard=minlen This enables/disables the use of discard/TRIM commands. +discard The discard/TRIM commands are sent to the underlying +nodiscard(*) block device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD + devices and sparse/thinly-provisioned LUNs. The FITRIM ioctl + command is also available together with the nodiscard option. + The value of minlen specifies the minimum blockcount, when + a TRIM command to the block device is considered usefull. + When no value is given to the discard option, it defaults to + 64 blocks, which means 256KiB in JFS. + The minlen value of discard overrides the minlen value given + on an FITRIM ioctl(). The JFS mailing list can be subscribed to by using the link labeled "Mail list Subscribe" at our web page http://jfs.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt index f50f26c..f2571c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt @@ -12,9 +12,47 @@ and work is in progress on adding support for minor version 1 of the NFSv4 protocol. The purpose of this document is to provide information on some of the -upcall interfaces that are used in order to provide the NFS client with -some of the information that it requires in order to fully comply with -the NFS spec. +special features of the NFS client that can be configured by system +administrators. + + +The nfs4_unique_id parameter +============================ + +NFSv4 requires clients to identify themselves to servers with a unique +string. File open and lock state shared between one client and one server +is associated with this identity. To support robust NFSv4 state recovery +and transparent state migration, this identity string must not change +across client reboots. + +Without any other intervention, the Linux client uses a string that contains +the local system's node name. System administrators, however, often do not +take care to ensure that node names are fully qualified and do not change +over the lifetime of a client system. Node names can have other +administrative requirements that require particular behavior that does not +work well as part of an nfs_client_id4 string. + +The nfs.nfs4_unique_id boot parameter specifies a unique string that can be +used instead of a system's node name when an NFS client identifies itself to +a server. Thus, if the system's node name is not unique, or it changes, its +nfs.nfs4_unique_id stays the same, preventing collision with other clients +or loss of state during NFS reboot recovery or transparent state migration. + +The nfs.nfs4_unique_id string is typically a UUID, though it can contain +anything that is believed to be unique across all NFS clients. An +nfs4_unique_id string should be chosen when a client system is installed, +just as a system's root file system gets a fresh UUID in its label at +install time. + +The string should remain fixed for the lifetime of the client. It can be +changed safely if care is taken that the client shuts down cleanly and all +outstanding NFSv4 state has expired, to prevent loss of NFSv4 state. + +This string can be stored in an NFS client's grub.conf, or it can be provided +via a net boot facility such as PXE. It may also be specified as an nfs.ko +module parameter. Specifying a uniquifier string is not support for NFS +clients running in containers. + The DNS resolver ================ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..56a96fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Administrative interfaces for nfsd +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Note that normally these interfaces are used only by the utilities in +nfs-utils. + +nfsd is controlled mainly by pseudofiles under the "nfsd" filesystem, +which is normally mounted at /proc/fs/nfsd/. + +The server is always started by the first write of a nonzero value to +nfsd/threads. + +Before doing that, NFSD can be told which sockets to listen on by +writing to nfsd/portlist; that write may be: + + - an ascii-encoded file descriptor, which should refer to a + bound (and listening, for tcp) socket, or + - "transportname port", where transportname is currently either + "udp", "tcp", or "rdma". + +If nfsd is started without doing any of these, then it will create one +udp and one tcp listener at port 2049 (see nfsd_init_socks). + +On startup, nfsd and lockd grace periods start. + +nfsd is shut down by a write of 0 to nfsd/threads. All locks and state +are thrown away at that point. + +Between startup and shutdown, the number of threads may be adjusted up +or down by additional writes to nfsd/threads or by writes to +nfsd/pool_threads. + +For more detail about files under nfsd/ and what they control, see +fs/nfsd/nfsctl.c; most of them have detailed comments. + +Implementation notes +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Note that the rpc server requires the caller to serialize addition and +removal of listening sockets, and startup and shutdown of the server. +For nfsd this is done using nfsd_mutex. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index fb0a6ae..a1793d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Table of Contents 2 Modifying System Parameters 3 Per-Process Parameters - 3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_adj & /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj - Adjust the oom-killer + 3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj - Adjust the oom-killer score 3.2 /proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score 3.3 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields @@ -1320,10 +1320,10 @@ of the kernel. CHAPTER 3: PER-PROCESS PARAMETERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_adj & /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj- Adjust the oom-killer score +3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj- Adjust the oom-killer score -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -These file can be used to adjust the badness heuristic used to select which +This file can be used to adjust the badness heuristic used to select which process gets killed in out of memory conditions. The badness heuristic assigns a value to each candidate task ranging from 0 @@ -1361,22 +1361,10 @@ same system, cpuset, mempolicy, or memory controller resources to use at least equivalent to discounting 50% of the task's allowed memory from being considered as scoring against the task. -For backwards compatibility with previous kernels, /proc/<pid>/oom_adj may also -be used to tune the badness score. Its acceptable values range from -16 -(OOM_ADJUST_MIN) to +15 (OOM_ADJUST_MAX) and a special value of -17 -(OOM_DISABLE) to disable oom killing entirely for that task. Its value is -scaled linearly with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj. - -Writing to /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj or /proc/<pid>/oom_adj will change the -other with its scaled value. - The value of /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj may be reduced no lower than the last value set by a CAP_SYS_RESOURCE process. To reduce the value any lower requires CAP_SYS_RESOURCE. -NOTICE: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj is deprecated and will be removed, please see -Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt. - Caveat: when a parent task is selected, the oom killer will sacrifice any first generation children with separate address spaces instead, if possible. This avoids servers and important system daemons from being killed and loses the @@ -1387,9 +1375,7 @@ minimal amount of work. ------------------------------------------------------------- This file can be used to check the current score used by the oom-killer is for -any given <pid>. Use it together with /proc/<pid>/oom_adj to tune which -process should be killed in an out-of-memory situation. - +any given <pid>. 3.3 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields ------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 index ef89855..5bc5134 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 @@ -56,6 +56,6 @@ The junction temperature is calculated: The junction temperature attribute is supported by the driver. The battery temperature is calculated: - Degree Celcius = 1 / (t1 + 1/298)- 273 + Degree Celsius = 1 / (t1 + 1/298)- 273 where t1 = (1/B)* ln(( ADCval * 2.5)/(R25*ITBAT*255)) Default values of R25, B, ITBAT are 10e3, 3380 and 50e-6 respectively. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 index d6f8d9c..e6d8739 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Supported chips: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf Authors: - Alexey Fisher <fishor@mail.ru>, + Oleksij Rempel <bug-track@fisher-privat.net>, Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> Description diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon index ef79843..c3a3a5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon @@ -41,5 +41,5 @@ Channel Signal The Sysfs nodes will represent the voltage in the units of mV, the temperature channel shows the converted temperature in -degree celcius. The Battery charging current channel represents +degree Celsius. The Battery charging current channel represents battery charging current in mA. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro index 2e758b0..b88f91a 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro @@ -20,7 +20,10 @@ Supported adapters: Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX855/VX875 - Datasheet: Availability unknown + Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw + + * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX900 + Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw Authors: Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>, @@ -57,6 +60,7 @@ Your lspci -n listing must show one of these : device 1106:8324 (CX700) device 1106:8353 (VX800/VX820) device 1106:8409 (VX855/VX875) + device 1106:8410 (VX900) If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio index bd9b229..d4d91a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio +++ b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio @@ -63,3 +63,21 @@ static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = { .platform_data = &myboard_i2cmux_data, }, }; + +If you don't know the absolute GPIO pin numbers at registration time, +you can instead provide a chip name (.chip_name) and relative GPIO pin +numbers, and the i2c-gpio-mux driver will do the work for you, +including deferred probing if the GPIO chip isn't immediately +available. + +Device Registration +------------------- + +When registering your i2c-gpio-mux device, you should pass the number +of any GPIO pin it uses as the device ID. This guarantees that every +instance has a different ID. + +Alternatively, if you don't need a stable device name, you can simply +pass PLATFORM_DEVID_AUTO as the device ID, and the platform core will +assign a dynamic ID to your device. If you do not know the absolute +GPIO pin numbers at registration time, this is even the only option. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 849b771..2152b0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -178,7 +178,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'V' C0 linux/ivtv.h conflict! 'V' C0 media/davinci/vpfe_capture.h conflict! 'V' C0 media/si4713.h conflict! -'V' C0-CF drivers/media/video/mxb.h conflict! 'W' 00-1F linux/watchdog.h conflict! 'W' 00-1F linux/wanrouter.h conflict! 'W' 00-3F sound/asound.h conflict! @@ -204,8 +203,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'c' A0-AF arch/x86/include/asm/msr.h conflict! 'd' 00-FF linux/char/drm/drm/h conflict! 'd' 02-40 pcmcia/ds.h conflict! -'d' 10-3F drivers/media/video/dabusb.h conflict! -'d' C0-CF drivers/media/video/saa7191.h conflict! 'd' F0-FF linux/digi1.h 'e' all linux/digi1.h conflict! 'e' 00-1F drivers/net/irda/irtty-sir.h conflict! @@ -267,9 +264,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! -'v' C0-DF media/pwc-ioctl.h conflict! 'v' C0-FF linux/meye.h conflict! -'v' D0-DF drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h conflict! 'w' all CERN SCI driver 'y' 00-1F packet based user level communications <mailto:zapman@interlan.net> diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index ab0a984..ec9ae67 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This document describes the Linux kernel Makefiles. === 7 Kbuild syntax for exported headers --- 7.1 header-y - --- 7.2 objhdr-y + --- 7.2 genhdr-y --- 7.3 destination-y --- 7.4 generic-y @@ -1282,15 +1282,15 @@ See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file. Subdirectories are visited before their parent directories. - --- 7.2 objhdr-y + --- 7.2 genhdr-y - objhdr-y specifies generated files to be exported. + genhdr-y specifies generated files to be exported. Generated files are special as they need to be looked up in another directory when doing 'make O=...' builds. Example: #include/linux/Kbuild - objhdr-y += version.h + genhdr-y += version.h --- 7.3 destination-y diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index f777fa9..e2ed336 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1730,6 +1730,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. will be autodetected by the client, and it will fall back to using the idmapper. To turn off this behaviour, set the value to '0'. + nfs.nfs4_unique_id= + [NFS4] Specify an additional fixed unique ident- + ification string that NFSv4 clients can insert into + their nfs_client_id4 string. This is typically a + UUID that is generated at system install time. nfs.send_implementation_id = [NFSv4.1] Send client implementation identification diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt index fad2feb..c2743f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt @@ -10,8 +10,22 @@ Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com) Description ----------- LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via -the led class control interface. Channels have generic names: -lp5523:channelx where x is 0...8 +the led class control interface. +The name of each channel is configurable in the platform data - name and label. +There are three options to make the channel name. + +a) Define the 'name' in the platform data +To make specific channel name, then use 'name' platform data. +/sys/class/leds/R1 (name: 'R1') +/sys/class/leds/B1 (name: 'B1') + +b) Use the 'label' with no 'name' field +For one device name with channel number, then use 'label'. +/sys/class/leds/RGB:channelN (label: 'RGB', N: 0 ~ 8) + +c) Default +If both fields are NULL, 'lp5523' is used by default. +/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channelN (N: 0 ~ 8) The chip provides 3 engines. Each engine can control channels without interaction from the main CPU. Details of the micro engine code can be found @@ -46,12 +60,13 @@ Note - chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8. static struct lp5523_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = { { + .name = "D1", .chan_nr = 0, .led_current = 50, .max_current = 130, }, ... - }, { + { .chan_nr = 8, .led_current = 50, .max_current = 130, diff --git a/Documentation/memory.txt b/Documentation/memory.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 802efe5..0000000 --- a/Documentation/memory.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -There are several classic problems related to memory on Linux -systems. - - 1) There are some motherboards that will not cache above - a certain quantity of memory. If you have one of these - motherboards, your system will be SLOWER, not faster - as you add more memory. Consider exchanging your - motherboard. - -All of these problems can be addressed with the "mem=XXXM" boot option -(where XXX is the size of RAM to use in megabytes). -It can also tell Linux to use less memory than is actually installed. -If you use "mem=" on a machine with PCI, consider using "memmap=" to avoid -physical address space collisions. - -See the documentation of your boot loader (LILO, grub, loadlin, etc.) about -how to pass options to the kernel. - -There are other memory problems which Linux cannot deal with. Random -corruption of memory is usually a sign of serious hardware trouble. -Try: - - * Reducing memory settings in the BIOS to the most conservative - timings. - - * Adding a cooling fan. - - * Not overclocking your CPU. - - * Having the memory tested in a memory tester or exchanged - with the vendor. Consider testing it with memtest86 yourself. - - * Exchanging your CPU, cache, or motherboard for one that works. diff --git a/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt b/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d3c824 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Percpu rw semaphores +-------------------- + +Percpu rw semaphores is a new read-write semaphore design that is +optimized for locking for reading. + +The problem with traditional read-write semaphores is that when multiple +cores take the lock for reading, the cache line containing the semaphore +is bouncing between L1 caches of the cores, causing performance +degradation. + +Locking for reading is very fast, it uses RCU and it avoids any atomic +instruction in the lock and unlock path. On the other hand, locking for +writing is very expensive, it calls synchronize_rcu() that can take +hundreds of milliseconds. + +The lock is declared with "struct percpu_rw_semaphore" type. +The lock is initialized percpu_init_rwsem, it returns 0 on success and +-ENOMEM on allocation failure. +The lock must be freed with percpu_free_rwsem to avoid memory leak. + +The lock is locked for read with percpu_down_read, percpu_up_read and +for write with percpu_down_write, percpu_up_write. + +The idea of using RCU for optimized rw-lock was introduced by +Eric Dumazet <eric.dumazet@gmail.com>. +The code was written by Mikulas Patocka <mpatocka@redhat.com> diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt index 2f0ddc1..9c647bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt @@ -81,6 +81,9 @@ This defines trickle and fast charges. For batteries that are already charged or discharging, 'n/a' can be displayed (or 'unknown', if the status is not known). +AUTHENTIC - indicates the power supply (battery or charger) connected +to the platform is authentic(1) or non authentic(0). + HEALTH - represents health of the battery, values corresponds to POWER_SUPPLY_HEALTH_*, defined in battery.h. @@ -113,8 +116,12 @@ be negative; there is no empty or full value. It is only useful for relative, time-based measurements. CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT - constant charge current programmed by charger. +CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT_MAX - maximum charge current supported by the +power supply object. CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE - constant charge voltage programmed by charger. +CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE_MAX - maximum charge voltage supported by the +power supply object. ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy. diff --git a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt index 7561d7e..8ffb274 100644 --- a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt +++ b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt @@ -69,6 +69,7 @@ MAC/FDDI addresses: %pMR 05:04:03:02:01:00 %pMF 00-01-02-03-04-05 %pm 000102030405 + %pmR 050403020100 For printing 6-byte MAC/FDDI addresses in hex notation. The 'M' and 'm' specifiers result in a printed address with ('M') or without ('m') byte diff --git a/Documentation/prio_tree.txt b/Documentation/prio_tree.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 3aa68f9..0000000 --- a/Documentation/prio_tree.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ -The prio_tree.c code indexes vmas using 3 different indexes: - * heap_index = vm_pgoff + vm_size_in_pages : end_vm_pgoff - * radix_index = vm_pgoff : start_vm_pgoff - * size_index = vm_size_in_pages - -A regular radix-priority-search-tree indexes vmas using only heap_index and -radix_index. The conditions for indexing are: - * ->heap_index >= ->left->heap_index && - ->heap_index >= ->right->heap_index - * if (->heap_index == ->left->heap_index) - then ->radix_index < ->left->radix_index; - * if (->heap_index == ->right->heap_index) - then ->radix_index < ->right->radix_index; - * nodes are hashed to left or right subtree using radix_index - similar to a pure binary radix tree. - -A regular radix-priority-search-tree helps to store and query -intervals (vmas). However, a regular radix-priority-search-tree is only -suitable for storing vmas with different radix indices (vm_pgoff). - -Therefore, the prio_tree.c extends the regular radix-priority-search-tree -to handle many vmas with the same vm_pgoff. Such vmas are handled in -2 different ways: 1) All vmas with the same radix _and_ heap indices are -linked using vm_set.list, 2) if there are many vmas with the same radix -index, but different heap indices and if the regular radix-priority-search -tree cannot index them all, we build an overflow-sub-tree that indexes such -vmas using heap and size indices instead of heap and radix indices. For -example, in the figure below some vmas with vm_pgoff = 0 (zero) are -indexed by regular radix-priority-search-tree whereas others are pushed -into an overflow-subtree. Note that all vmas in an overflow-sub-tree have -the same vm_pgoff (radix_index) and if necessary we build different -overflow-sub-trees to handle each possible radix_index. For example, -in figure we have 3 overflow-sub-trees corresponding to radix indices -0, 2, and 4. - -In the final tree the first few (prio_tree_root->index_bits) levels -are indexed using heap and radix indices whereas the overflow-sub-trees below -those levels (i.e. levels prio_tree_root->index_bits + 1 and higher) are -indexed using heap and size indices. In overflow-sub-trees the size_index -is used for hashing the nodes to appropriate places. - -Now, an example prio_tree: - - vmas are represented [radix_index, size_index, heap_index] - i.e., [start_vm_pgoff, vm_size_in_pages, end_vm_pgoff] - -level prio_tree_root->index_bits = 3 ------ - _ - 0 [0,7,7] | - / \ | - ------------------ ------------ | Regular - / \ | radix priority - 1 [1,6,7] [4,3,7] | search tree - / \ / \ | - ------- ----- ------ ----- | heap-and-radix - / \ / \ | indexed - 2 [0,6,6] [2,5,7] [5,2,7] [6,1,7] | - / \ / \ / \ / \ | - 3 [0,5,5] [1,5,6] [2,4,6] [3,4,7] [4,2,6] [5,1,6] [6,0,6] [7,0,7] | - / / / _ - / / / _ - 4 [0,4,4] [2,3,5] [4,1,5] | - / / / | - 5 [0,3,3] [2,2,4] [4,0,4] | Overflow-sub-trees - / / | - 6 [0,2,2] [2,1,3] | heap-and-size - / / | indexed - 7 [0,1,1] [2,0,2] | - / | - 8 [0,0,0] | - _ - -Note that we use prio_tree_root->index_bits to optimize the height -of the heap-and-radix indexed tree. Since prio_tree_root->index_bits is -set according to the maximum end_vm_pgoff mapped, we are sure that all -bits (in vm_pgoff) above prio_tree_root->index_bits are 0 (zero). Therefore, -we only use the first prio_tree_root->index_bits as radix_index. -Whenever index_bits is increased in prio_tree_expand, we shuffle the tree -to make sure that the first prio_tree_root->index_bits levels of the tree -is indexed properly using heap and radix indices. - -We do not optimize the height of overflow-sub-trees using index_bits. -The reason is: there can be many such overflow-sub-trees and all of -them have to be suffled whenever the index_bits increases. This may involve -walking the whole prio_tree in prio_tree_insert->prio_tree_expand code -path which is not desirable. Hence, we do not optimize the height of the -heap-and-size indexed overflow-sub-trees using prio_tree->index_bits. -Instead the overflow sub-trees are indexed using full BITS_PER_LONG bits -of size_index. This may lead to skewed sub-trees because most of the -higher significant bits of the size_index are likely to be 0 (zero). In -the example above, all 3 overflow-sub-trees are skewed. This may marginally -affect the performance. However, processes rarely map many vmas with the -same start_vm_pgoff but different end_vm_pgoffs. Therefore, we normally -do not require overflow-sub-trees to index all vmas. - -From the above discussion it is clear that the maximum height of -a prio_tree can be prio_tree_root->index_bits + BITS_PER_LONG. -However, in most of the common cases we do not need overflow-sub-trees, -so the tree height in the common cases will be prio_tree_root->index_bits. - -It is fair to mention here that the prio_tree_root->index_bits -is increased on demand, however, the index_bits is not decreased when -vmas are removed from the prio_tree. That's tricky to do. Hence, it's -left as a home work problem. - - diff --git a/Documentation/pwm.txt b/Documentation/pwm.txt index 554290e..7d2b4c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/pwm.txt @@ -36,7 +36,8 @@ Legacy users can request a PWM device using pwm_request() and free it after usage with pwm_free(). New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer -device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. +device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed +variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist. After being requested a PWM has to be configured using: diff --git a/Documentation/ramoops.txt b/Documentation/ramoops.txt index 197ad59..69b3cac 100644 --- a/Documentation/ramoops.txt +++ b/Documentation/ramoops.txt @@ -102,9 +102,7 @@ related hangs. The functions call chain log is stored in a "ftrace-ramoops" file. Here is an example of usage: # mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug/ - # cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing - # echo function > current_tracer - # echo 1 > options/func_pstore + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/pstore/record_ftrace # reboot -f [...] # mount -t pstore pstore /mnt/ diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt index 8d32d85..61b6c48 100644 --- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt @@ -193,24 +193,55 @@ Example: Support for Augmented rbtrees ----------------------------- -Augmented rbtree is an rbtree with "some" additional data stored in each node. -This data can be used to augment some new functionality to rbtree. -Augmented rbtree is an optional feature built on top of basic rbtree -infrastructure. An rbtree user who wants this feature will have to call the -augmentation functions with the user provided augmentation callback -when inserting and erasing nodes. - -On insertion, the user must call rb_augment_insert() once the new node is in -place. This will cause the augmentation function callback to be called for -each node between the new node and the root which has been affected by the -insertion. - -When erasing a node, the user must call rb_augment_erase_begin() first to -retrieve the deepest node on the rebalance path. Then, after erasing the -original node, the user must call rb_augment_erase_end() with the deepest -node found earlier. This will cause the augmentation function to be called -for each affected node between the deepest node and the root. - +Augmented rbtree is an rbtree with "some" additional data stored in +each node, where the additional data for node N must be a function of +the contents of all nodes in the subtree rooted at N. This data can +be used to augment some new functionality to rbtree. Augmented rbtree +is an optional feature built on top of basic rbtree infrastructure. +An rbtree user who wants this feature will have to call the augmentation +functions with the user provided augmentation callback when inserting +and erasing nodes. + +C files implementing augmented rbtree manipulation must include +<linux/rbtree_augmented.h> instead of <linus/rbtree.h>. Note that +linux/rbtree_augmented.h exposes some rbtree implementations details +you are not expected to rely on; please stick to the documented APIs +there and do not include <linux/rbtree_augmented.h> from header files +either so as to minimize chances of your users accidentally relying on +such implementation details. + +On insertion, the user must update the augmented information on the path +leading to the inserted node, then call rb_link_node() as usual and +rb_augment_inserted() instead of the usual rb_insert_color() call. +If rb_augment_inserted() rebalances the rbtree, it will callback into +a user provided function to update the augmented information on the +affected subtrees. + +When erasing a node, the user must call rb_erase_augmented() instead of +rb_erase(). rb_erase_augmented() calls back into user provided functions +to updated the augmented information on affected subtrees. + +In both cases, the callbacks are provided through struct rb_augment_callbacks. +3 callbacks must be defined: + +- A propagation callback, which updates the augmented value for a given + node and its ancestors, up to a given stop point (or NULL to update + all the way to the root). + +- A copy callback, which copies the augmented value for a given subtree + to a newly assigned subtree root. + +- A tree rotation callback, which copies the augmented value for a given + subtree to a newly assigned subtree root AND recomputes the augmented + information for the former subtree root. + +The compiled code for rb_erase_augmented() may inline the propagation and +copy callbacks, which results in a large function, so each augmented rbtree +user should have a single rb_erase_augmented() call site in order to limit +compiled code size. + + +Sample usage: Interval tree is an example of augmented rb tree. Reference - "Introduction to Algorithms" by Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest and Stein. @@ -230,26 +261,132 @@ and its immediate children. And this will be used in O(log n) lookup for lowest match (lowest start address among all possible matches) with something like: -find_lowest_match(lo, hi, node) +struct interval_tree_node * +interval_tree_first_match(struct rb_root *root, + unsigned long start, unsigned long last) { - lowest_match = NULL; - while (node) { - if (max_hi(node->left) > lo) { - // Lowest overlap if any must be on left side - node = node->left; - } else if (overlap(lo, hi, node)) { - lowest_match = node; - break; - } else if (lo > node->lo) { - // Lowest overlap if any must be on right side - node = node->right; - } else { - break; + struct interval_tree_node *node; + + if (!root->rb_node) + return NULL; + node = rb_entry(root->rb_node, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + + while (true) { + if (node->rb.rb_left) { + struct interval_tree_node *left = + rb_entry(node->rb.rb_left, + struct interval_tree_node, rb); + if (left->__subtree_last >= start) { + /* + * Some nodes in left subtree satisfy Cond2. + * Iterate to find the leftmost such node N. + * If it also satisfies Cond1, that's the match + * we are looking for. Otherwise, there is no + * matching interval as nodes to the right of N + * can't satisfy Cond1 either. + */ + node = left; + continue; + } } + if (node->start <= last) { /* Cond1 */ + if (node->last >= start) /* Cond2 */ + return node; /* node is leftmost match */ + if (node->rb.rb_right) { + node = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_right, + struct interval_tree_node, rb); + if (node->__subtree_last >= start) + continue; + } + } + return NULL; /* No match */ + } +} + +Insertion/removal are defined using the following augmented callbacks: + +static inline unsigned long +compute_subtree_last(struct interval_tree_node *node) +{ + unsigned long max = node->last, subtree_last; + if (node->rb.rb_left) { + subtree_last = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_left, + struct interval_tree_node, rb)->__subtree_last; + if (max < subtree_last) + max = subtree_last; + } + if (node->rb.rb_right) { + subtree_last = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_right, + struct interval_tree_node, rb)->__subtree_last; + if (max < subtree_last) + max = subtree_last; + } + return max; +} + +static void augment_propagate(struct rb_node *rb, struct rb_node *stop) +{ + while (rb != stop) { + struct interval_tree_node *node = + rb_entry(rb, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + unsigned long subtree_last = compute_subtree_last(node); + if (node->__subtree_last == subtree_last) + break; + node->__subtree_last = subtree_last; + rb = rb_parent(&node->rb); } - return lowest_match; } -Finding exact match will be to first find lowest match and then to follow -successor nodes looking for exact match, until the start of a node is beyond -the hi value we are looking for. +static void augment_copy(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new) +{ + struct interval_tree_node *old = + rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + struct interval_tree_node *new = + rb_entry(rb_new, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + + new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last; +} + +static void augment_rotate(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new) +{ + struct interval_tree_node *old = + rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + struct interval_tree_node *new = + rb_entry(rb_new, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + + new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last; + old->__subtree_last = compute_subtree_last(old); +} + +static const struct rb_augment_callbacks augment_callbacks = { + augment_propagate, augment_copy, augment_rotate +}; + +void interval_tree_insert(struct interval_tree_node *node, + struct rb_root *root) +{ + struct rb_node **link = &root->rb_node, *rb_parent = NULL; + unsigned long start = node->start, last = node->last; + struct interval_tree_node *parent; + + while (*link) { + rb_parent = *link; + parent = rb_entry(rb_parent, struct interval_tree_node, rb); + if (parent->__subtree_last < last) + parent->__subtree_last = last; + if (start < parent->start) + link = &parent->rb.rb_left; + else + link = &parent->rb.rb_right; + } + + node->__subtree_last = last; + rb_link_node(&node->rb, rb_parent, link); + rb_insert_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks); +} + +void interval_tree_remove(struct interval_tree_node *node, + struct rb_root *root) +{ + rb_erase_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks); +} diff --git a/Documentation/remoteproc.txt b/Documentation/remoteproc.txt index 23a09b8..e6469fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/remoteproc.txt +++ b/Documentation/remoteproc.txt @@ -129,6 +129,13 @@ int dummy_rproc_example(struct rproc *my_rproc) Returns 0 on success and -EINVAL if @rproc isn't valid. + void rproc_report_crash(struct rproc *rproc, enum rproc_crash_type type) + - Report a crash in a remoteproc + This function must be called every time a crash is detected by the + platform specific rproc implementation. This should not be called from a + non-remoteproc driver. This function can be called from atomic/interrupt + context. + 5. Implementation callbacks These callbacks should be provided by platform-specific remoteproc diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt index 2501604..32aa400 100644 --- a/Documentation/rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt @@ -119,8 +119,9 @@ three different userspace interfaces: * /sys/class/rtc/rtcN ... sysfs attributes support readonly access to some RTC attributes. - * /proc/driver/rtc ... the first RTC (rtc0) may expose itself - using a procfs interface. More information is (currently) shown + * /proc/driver/rtc ... the system clock RTC may expose itself + using a procfs interface. If there is no RTC for the system clock, + rtc0 is used by default. More information is (currently) shown here than through sysfs. The RTC Class framework supports a wide variety of RTCs, ranging from those diff --git a/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt b/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b492e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +What is smsc-ece1099? +---------------------- + +The ECE1099 is a 40-Pin 3.3V Keyboard Scan Expansion +or GPIO Expansion device. The device supports a keyboard +scan matrix of 23x8. The device is connected to a Master +via the SMSC BC-Link interface or via the SMBus. +Keypad scan Input(KSI) and Keypad Scan Output(KSO) signals +are multiplexed with GPIOs. + +Interrupt generation +-------------------- + +Interrupts can be generated by an edge detection on a GPIO +pin or an edge detection on one of the bus interface pins. +Interrupts can also be detected on the keyboard scan interface. +The bus interrupt pin (BC_INT# or SMBUS_INT#) is asserted if +any bit in one of the Interrupt Status registers is 1 and +the corresponding Interrupt Mask bit is also 1. + +In order for software to determine which device is the source +of an interrupt, it should first read the Group Interrupt Status Register +to determine which Status register group is a source for the interrupt. +Software should read both the Status register and the associated Mask register, +then AND the two values together. Bits that are 1 in the result of the AND +are active interrupts. Software clears an interrupt by writing a 1 to the +corresponding bit in the Status register. + +Communication Protocol +---------------------- + +- SMbus slave Interface + The host processor communicates with the ECE1099 device + through a series of read/write registers via the SMBus + interface. SMBus is a serial communication protocol between + a computer host and its peripheral devices. The SMBus data + rate is 10KHz minimum to 400 KHz maximum + +- Slave Bus Interface + The ECE1099 device SMBus implementation is a subset of the + SMBus interface to the host. The device is a slave-only SMBus device. + The implementation in the device is a subset of SMBus since it + only supports four protocols. + + The Write Byte, Read Byte, Send Byte, and Receive Byte protocols are the + only valid SMBus protocols for the device. + +- BC-LinkTM Interface + The BC-Link is a proprietary bus that allows communication + between a Master device and a Companion device. The Master + device uses this serial bus to read and write registers + located on the Companion device. The bus comprises three signals, + BC_CLK, BC_DAT and BC_INT#. The Master device always provides the + clock, BC_CLK, and the Companion device is the source for an + independent asynchronous interrupt signal, BC_INT#. The ECE1099 + supports BC-Link speeds up to 24MHz. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 4e4d0bc..d90d8ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -860,8 +860,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. [Multiple options for each card instance] model - force the model name - position_fix - Fix DMA pointer (0 = auto, 1 = use LPIB, 2 = POSBUF, - 3 = VIACOMBO, 4 = COMBO) + position_fix - Fix DMA pointer + -1 = system default: choose appropriate one per controller + hardware + 0 = auto: falls back to LPIB when POSBUF doesn't work + 1 = use LPIB + 2 = POSBUF: use position buffer + 3 = VIACOMBO: VIA-specific workaround for capture + 4 = COMBO: use LPIB for playback, auto for capture stream probe_mask - Bitmask to probe codecs (default = -1, meaning all slots) When the bit 8 (0x100) is set, the lower 8 bits are used as the "fixed" codec slots; i.e. the driver probes the diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c43d1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +ALSA PCM channel-mapping API +============================ + Takashi Iwai <tiwai@suse.de> + +GENERAL +------- + +The channel mapping API allows user to query the possible channel maps +and the current channel map, also optionally to modify the channel map +of the current stream. + +A channel map is an array of position for each PCM channel. +Typically, a stereo PCM stream has a channel map of + { front_left, front_right } +while a 4.0 surround PCM stream has a channel map of + { front left, front right, rear left, rear right }. + +The problem, so far, was that we had no standard channel map +explicitly, and applications had no way to know which channel +corresponds to which (speaker) position. Thus, applications applied +wrong channels for 5.1 outputs, and you hear suddenly strange sound +from rear. Or, some devices secretly assume that center/LFE is the +third/fourth channels while others that C/LFE as 5th/6th channels. + +Also, some devices such as HDMI are configurable for different speaker +positions even with the same number of total channels. However, there +was no way to specify this because of lack of channel map +specification. These are the main motivations for the new channel +mapping API. + + +DESIGN +------ + +Actually, "the channel mapping API" doesn't introduce anything new in +the kernel/user-space ABI perspective. It uses only the existing +control element features. + +As a ground design, each PCM substream may contain a control element +providing the channel mapping information and configuration. This +element is specified by: + iface = SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_IFACE_PCM + name = "Playback Channel Map" or "Capture Channel Map" + device = the same device number for the assigned PCM substream + index = the same index number for the assigned PCM substream + +Note the name is different depending on the PCM substream direction. + +Each control element provides at least the TLV read operation and the +read operation. Optionally, the write operation can be provided to +allow user to change the channel map dynamically. + +* TLV + +The TLV operation gives the list of available channel +maps. A list item of a channel map is usually a TLV of + type data-bytes ch0 ch1 ch2... +where type is the TLV type value, the second argument is the total +bytes (not the numbers) of channel values, and the rest are the +position value for each channel. + +As a TLV type, either SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED, +SNDRV_CTL_TLV_CHMAP_VAR or SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_PAIRED can be used. +The _FIXED type is for a channel map with the fixed channel position +while the latter two are for flexible channel positions. _VAR type is +for a channel map where all channels are freely swappable and _PAIRED +type is where pair-wise channels are swappable. For example, when you +have {FL/FR/RL/RR} channel map, _PAIRED type would allow you to swap +only {RL/RR/FL/FR} while _VAR type would allow even swapping FL and +RR. + +These new TLV types are defined in sound/tlv.h. + +The available channel position values are defined in sound/asound.h, +here is a cut: + +/* channel positions */ +enum { + SNDRV_CHMAP_UNKNOWN = 0, + SNDRV_CHMAP_NA, /* N/A, silent */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_MONO, /* mono stream */ + /* this follows the alsa-lib mixer channel value + 3 */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FL, /* front left */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FR, /* front right */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RL, /* rear left */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RR, /* rear right */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FC, /* front center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_LFE, /* LFE */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_SL, /* side left */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_SR, /* side right */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RC, /* rear center */ + /* new definitions */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FLC, /* front left center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FRC, /* front right center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RLC, /* rear left center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RRC, /* rear right center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FLW, /* front left wide */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FRW, /* front right wide */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FLH, /* front left high */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FCH, /* front center high */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_FRH, /* front right high */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TC, /* top center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TFL, /* top front left */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TFR, /* top front right */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TFC, /* top front center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TRL, /* top rear left */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TRR, /* top rear right */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_TRC, /* top rear center */ + SNDRV_CHMAP_LAST = SNDRV_CHMAP_TRC, +}; + +When a PCM stream can provide more than one channel map, you can +provide multiple channel maps in a TLV container type. The TLV data +to be returned will contain such as: + SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CONTAINER 96 + SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 4 SNDRV_CHMAP_FC + SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 8 SNDRV_CHMAP_FL SNDRV_CHMAP_FR + SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 16 NDRV_CHMAP_FL SNDRV_CHMAP_FR \ + SNDRV_CHMAP_RL SNDRV_CHMAP_RR + +The channel position is provided in LSB 16bits. The upper bits are +used for bit flags. + +#define SNDRV_CHMAP_POSITION_MASK 0xffff +#define SNDRV_CHMAP_PHASE_INVERSE (0x01 << 16) +#define SNDRV_CHMAP_DRIVER_SPEC (0x02 << 16) + +SNDRV_CHMAP_PHASE_INVERSE indicates the channel is phase inverted, +(thus summing left and right channels would result in almost silence). +Some digital mic devices have this. + +When SNDRV_CHMAP_DRIVER_SPEC is set, all the channel position values +don't follow the standard definition above but driver-specific. + +* READ OPERATION + +The control read operation is for providing the current channel map of +the given stream. The control element returns an integer array +containing the position of each channel. + +When this is performed before the number of the channel is specified +(i.e. hw_params is set), it should return all channels set to +UNKNOWN. + +* WRITE OPERATION + +The control write operation is optional, and only for devices that can +change the channel configuration on the fly, such as HDMI. User needs +to pass an integer value containing the valid channel positions for +all channels of the assigned PCM substream. + +This operation is allowed only at PCM PREPARED state. When called in +other states, it shall return an error. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index a92bba8..16dfe57 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -74,7 +74,8 @@ CMI9880 AD1882 / AD1882A ================ - 3stack 3-stack mode (default) + 3stack 3-stack mode + 3stack-automute 3-stack with automute front HP (default) 6stack 6-stack mode AD1884A / AD1883 / AD1984A / AD1984B diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 6d78841..2907ba6 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -181,6 +181,8 @@ core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. %p pid %u uid %g gid + %d dump mode, matches PR_SET_DUMPABLE and + /proc/sys/fs/suid_dumpable %s signal number %t UNIX time of dump %h hostname diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py index a78879b..3fe0d81 100755 --- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py @@ -402,8 +402,6 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += " .queue_data_in = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in,\n" buf += " .queue_status = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_status,\n" buf += " .queue_tm_rsp = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp,\n" - buf += " .get_fabric_sense_len = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len,\n" - buf += " .set_fabric_sense_len = " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len,\n" buf += " .is_state_remove = " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove,\n" buf += " /*\n" buf += " * Setup function pointers for generic logic in target_core_fabric_configfs.c\n" @@ -906,20 +904,6 @@ def tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += "}\n\n" bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp(struct se_cmd *);\n" - if re.search('get_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo): - buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void)\n" - buf += "{\n" - buf += " return 0;\n" - buf += "}\n\n" - bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void);\n" - - if re.search('set_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo): - buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *se_cmd, u32 sense_length)\n" - buf += "{\n" - buf += " return 0;\n" - buf += "}\n\n" - bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *, u32);\n" - if re.search('is_state_remove\)\(', fo): buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" buf += "{\n" diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index 652aecd..1299b5e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -35,3 +35,4 @@ 34 -> TerraTec Cinergy T PCIe Dual [153b:117e] 35 -> TeVii S471 [d471:9022] 36 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1255 [0070:2259] + 37 -> Prof Revolution DVB-S2 8000 [8000:3034] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt index 6e680fe..0b69e4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Table of Contents 1.0 Introduction - The file ../../drivers/media/video/c-qcam.c is a device driver for + The file ../../drivers/media/parport/c-qcam.c is a device driver for the Logitech (nee Connectix) parallel port interface color CCD camera. This is a fairly inexpensive device for capturing images. Logitech does not currently provide information for developers, but many people diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe b/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe index 7a460b0..dc9a297 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe @@ -5,22 +5,22 @@ File partitioning ----------------- V4L2 display device driver - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_display.c - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_display.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_display.c + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_display.h VPBE display controller - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe.c - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe.c + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe.h VPBE venc sub device driver - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc.c - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc.h - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc_regs.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc.c + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc_regs.h VPBE osd driver - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd.c - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd.h - drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd_regs.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd.c + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd.h + drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd_regs.h Functional partitioning ----------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt index eb04970..fd02d9a 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ data from LCD controller (FIMD) through the SoC internal writeback data path. There are multiple FIMC instances in the SoCs (up to 4), having slightly different capabilities, like pixel alignment constraints, rotator availability, LCD writeback support, etc. The driver is located at -drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc directory. +drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc directory. 1. Supported SoCs ================= @@ -36,21 +36,21 @@ Not currently supported: ===================== - media device driver - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/fimc-mdevice.[ch] + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/fimc-mdevice.[ch] - camera capture video device driver - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/fimc-capture.c + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/fimc-capture.c - MIPI-CSI2 receiver subdev - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/mipi-csis.[ch] + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/mipi-csis.[ch] - video post-processor (mem-to-mem) - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/fimc-core.c + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/fimc-core.c - common files - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/fimc-core.h - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/fimc-reg.h - drivers/media/video/s5p-fimc/regs-fimc.h + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/fimc-core.h + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/fimc-reg.h + drivers/media/platform/s5p-fimc/regs-fimc.h 4. User space interfaces ======================== diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt index 5dd1439..b9a9f83 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Introduction ============ This file documents the Texas Instruments OMAP 3 Image Signal Processor (ISP) -driver located under drivers/media/video/omap3isp. The original driver was +driver located under drivers/media/platform/omap3isp. The original driver was written by Texas Instruments but since that it has been rewritten (twice) at Nokia. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt index 43da22b..cfe52c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt @@ -136,11 +136,25 @@ Or alternatively for integer menu controls, by calling v4l2_ctrl_new_int_menu: const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops, u32 id, s32 max, s32 def, const s64 *qmenu_int); +Standard menu controls with a driver specific menu are added by calling +v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items: + + struct v4l2_ctrl *v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items( + struct v4l2_ctrl_handler *hdl, + const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops, u32 id, s32 max, + s32 skip_mask, s32 def, const char * const *qmenu); + These functions are typically called right after the v4l2_ctrl_handler_init: static const s64 exp_bias_qmenu[] = { -2, -1, 0, 1, 2 }; + static const char * const test_pattern[] = { + "Disabled", + "Vertical Bars", + "Solid Black", + "Solid White", + }; v4l2_ctrl_handler_init(&foo->ctrl_handler, nr_of_controls); v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&foo->ctrl_handler, &foo_ctrl_ops, @@ -156,6 +170,9 @@ These functions are typically called right after the v4l2_ctrl_handler_init: ARRAY_SIZE(exp_bias_qmenu) - 1, ARRAY_SIZE(exp_bias_qmenu) / 2 - 1, exp_bias_qmenu); + v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items(&foo->ctrl_handler, &foo_ctrl_ops, + V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN, ARRAY_SIZE(test_pattern) - 1, 0, + 0, test_pattern); ... if (foo->ctrl_handler.error) { int err = foo->ctrl_handler.error; @@ -185,6 +202,13 @@ v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu in that it doesn't have the mask argument and takes as the last argument an array of signed 64-bit integers that form an exact menu item list. +The v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items function is very similar to +v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu but takes an extra parameter qmenu, which is the driver +specific menu for an otherwise standard menu control. A good example for this +control is the test pattern control for capture/display/sensors devices that +have the capability to generate test patterns. These test patterns are hardware +specific, so the contents of the menu will vary from device to device. + Note that if something fails, the function will return NULL or an error and set ctrl_handler->error to the error code. If ctrl_handler->error was already set, then it will just return and do nothing. This is also true for @@ -594,7 +618,11 @@ handler and finally add the first handler to the second. For example: v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&radio_ctrl_handler, &radio_ops, V4L2_CID_AUDIO_MUTE, ...); v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&video_ctrl_handler, &video_ops, V4L2_CID_BRIGHTNESS, ...); v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&video_ctrl_handler, &video_ops, V4L2_CID_CONTRAST, ...); - v4l2_ctrl_add_handler(&video_ctrl_handler, &radio_ctrl_handler); + v4l2_ctrl_add_handler(&video_ctrl_handler, &radio_ctrl_handler, NULL); + +The last argument to v4l2_ctrl_add_handler() is a filter function that allows +you to filter which controls will be added. Set it to NULL if you want to add +all controls. Or you can add specific controls to a handler: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 89318be..32bfe92 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -583,11 +583,19 @@ You should also set these fields: - name: set to something descriptive and unique. +- vfl_dir: set this to VFL_DIR_RX for capture devices (VFL_DIR_RX has value 0, + so this is normally already the default), set to VFL_DIR_TX for output + devices and VFL_DIR_M2M for mem2mem (codec) devices. + - fops: set to the v4l2_file_operations struct. - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the - future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. + future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. The vfl_type and + vfl_dir fields are used to disable ops that do not match the type/dir + combination. E.g. VBI ops are disabled for non-VBI nodes, and output ops + are disabled for a capture device. This makes it possible to provide + just one v4l2_ioctl_ops struct for both vbi and video nodes. - lock: leave to NULL if you want to do all the locking in the driver. Otherwise you give it a pointer to a struct mutex_lock and before the @@ -1054,4 +1062,4 @@ The first event type in the class is reserved for future use, so the first available event type is 'class base + 1'. An example on how the V4L2 events may be used can be found in the OMAP -3 ISP driver (drivers/media/video/omap3isp). +3 ISP driver (drivers/media/platform/omap3isp). diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf index 1d00d7f..3ffe9e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ again. Developers who are interested in more information can go into the relevant header files; there are a few low-level functions declared there which have not been talked about here. Also worthwhile is the vivi driver -(drivers/media/video/vivi.c), which is maintained as an example of how V4L2 +(drivers/media/platform/vivi.c), which is maintained as an example of how V4L2 drivers should be written. Vivi only uses the vmalloc() API, but it's good enough to get started with. Note also that all of these calls are exported GPL-only, so they will not be available to non-GPL kernel modules. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index bf33aaa..f6ec3a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -857,7 +857,8 @@ struct kvm_userspace_memory_region { }; /* for kvm_memory_region::flags */ -#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES 1UL +#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES (1UL << 0) +#define KVM_MEM_READONLY (1UL << 1) This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory slot. When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest @@ -873,14 +874,17 @@ It is recommended that the lower 21 bits of guest_phys_addr and userspace_addr be identical. This allows large pages in the guest to be backed by large pages in the host. -The flags field supports just one flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which -instructs kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot. See -the KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl. +The flags field supports two flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which instructs +kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot. See KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG +ioctl. The KVM_CAP_READONLY_MEM capability indicates the availability of the +KVM_MEM_READONLY flag. When this flag is set for a memory region, KVM only +allows read accesses. Writes will be posted to userspace as KVM_EXIT_MMIO +exits. -When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability, changes in the backing of the memory -region are automatically reflected into the guest. For example, an mmap() -that affects the region will be made visible immediately. Another example -is madvise(MADV_DROP). +When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability is available, changes in the backing of +the memory region are automatically reflected into the guest. For example, an +mmap() that affects the region will be made visible immediately. Another +example is madvise(MADV_DROP). It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl. The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory @@ -1946,6 +1950,19 @@ the guest using the specified gsi pin. The irqfd is removed using the KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN flag, specifying both kvm_irqfd.fd and kvm_irqfd.gsi. +With KVM_CAP_IRQFD_RESAMPLE, KVM_IRQFD supports a de-assert and notify +mechanism allowing emulation of level-triggered, irqfd-based +interrupts. When KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_RESAMPLE is set the user must pass an +additional eventfd in the kvm_irqfd.resamplefd field. When operating +in resample mode, posting of an interrupt through kvm_irq.fd asserts +the specified gsi in the irqchip. When the irqchip is resampled, such +as from an EOI, the gsi is de-asserted and the user is notifed via +kvm_irqfd.resamplefd. It is the user's responsibility to re-queue +the interrupt if the device making use of it still requires service. +Note that closing the resamplefd is not sufficient to disable the +irqfd. The KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_RESAMPLE is only necessary on assignment +and need not be specified with KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN. + 4.76 KVM_PPC_ALLOCATE_HTAB Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_ALLOC_HTAB diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea113b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +Linux KVM Hypercall: +=================== +X86: + KVM Hypercalls have a three-byte sequence of either the vmcall or the vmmcall + instruction. The hypervisor can replace it with instructions that are + guaranteed to be supported. + + Up to four arguments may be passed in rbx, rcx, rdx, and rsi respectively. + The hypercall number should be placed in rax and the return value will be + placed in rax. No other registers will be clobbered unless explicitly stated + by the particular hypercall. + +S390: + R2-R7 are used for parameters 1-6. In addition, R1 is used for hypercall + number. The return value is written to R2. + + S390 uses diagnose instruction as hypercall (0x500) along with hypercall + number in R1. + + PowerPC: + It uses R3-R10 and hypercall number in R11. R4-R11 are used as output registers. + Return value is placed in R3. + + KVM hypercalls uses 4 byte opcode, that are patched with 'hypercall-instructions' + property inside the device tree's /hypervisor node. + For more information refer to Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt + +KVM Hypercalls Documentation +=========================== +The template for each hypercall is: +1. Hypercall name. +2. Architecture(s) +3. Status (deprecated, obsolete, active) +4. Purpose + +1. KVM_HC_VAPIC_POLL_IRQ +------------------------ +Architecture: x86 +Status: active +Purpose: Trigger guest exit so that the host can check for pending +interrupts on reentry. + +2. KVM_HC_MMU_OP +------------------------ +Architecture: x86 +Status: deprecated. +Purpose: Support MMU operations such as writing to PTE, +flushing TLB, release PT. + +3. KVM_HC_FEATURES +------------------------ +Architecture: PPC +Status: active +Purpose: Expose hypercall availability to the guest. On x86 platforms, cpuid +used to enumerate which hypercalls are available. On PPC, either device tree +based lookup ( which is also what EPAPR dictates) OR KVM specific enumeration +mechanism (which is this hypercall) can be used. + +4. KVM_HC_PPC_MAP_MAGIC_PAGE +------------------------ +Architecture: PPC +Status: active +Purpose: To enable communication between the hypervisor and guest there is a +shared page that contains parts of supervisor visible register state. +The guest can map this shared page to access its supervisor register through +memory using this hypercall. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt index 7304710..6d470ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt @@ -34,9 +34,12 @@ MSR_KVM_WALL_CLOCK_NEW: 0x4b564d00 time information and check that they are both equal and even. An odd version indicates an in-progress update. - sec: number of seconds for wallclock. + sec: number of seconds for wallclock at time of boot. - nsec: number of nanoseconds for wallclock. + nsec: number of nanoseconds for wallclock at time of boot. + + In order to get the current wallclock time, the system_time from + MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME_NEW needs to be added. Note that although MSRs are per-CPU entities, the effect of this particular MSR is global. @@ -82,20 +85,25 @@ MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME_NEW: 0x4b564d01 time at the time this structure was last updated. Unit is nanoseconds. - tsc_to_system_mul: a function of the tsc frequency. One has - to multiply any tsc-related quantity by this value to get - a value in nanoseconds, besides dividing by 2^tsc_shift + tsc_to_system_mul: multiplier to be used when converting + tsc-related quantity to nanoseconds - tsc_shift: cycle to nanosecond divider, as a power of two, to - allow for shift rights. One has to shift right any tsc-related - quantity by this value to get a value in nanoseconds, besides - multiplying by tsc_to_system_mul. + tsc_shift: shift to be used when converting tsc-related + quantity to nanoseconds. This shift will ensure that + multiplication with tsc_to_system_mul does not overflow. + A positive value denotes a left shift, a negative value + a right shift. - With this information, guests can derive per-CPU time by - doing: + The conversion from tsc to nanoseconds involves an additional + right shift by 32 bits. With this information, guests can + derive per-CPU time by doing: time = (current_tsc - tsc_timestamp) - time = (time * tsc_to_system_mul) >> tsc_shift + if (tsc_shift >= 0) + time <<= tsc_shift; + else + time >>= -tsc_shift; + time = (time * tsc_to_system_mul) >> 32 time = time + system_time flags: bits in this field indicate extended capabilities diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index 4911cf9..4cd076f 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -174,3 +174,25 @@ following: That way we can inject an arbitrary amount of code as replacement for a single instruction. This allows us to check for pending interrupts when setting EE=1 for example. + +Hypercall ABIs in KVM on PowerPC +================================= +1) KVM hypercalls (ePAPR) + +These are ePAPR compliant hypercall implementation (mentioned above). Even +generic hypercalls are implemented here, like the ePAPR idle hcall. These are +available on all targets. + +2) PAPR hypercalls + +PAPR hypercalls are needed to run server PowerPC PAPR guests (-M pseries in QEMU). +These are the same hypercalls that pHyp, the POWER hypervisor implements. Some of +them are handled in the kernel, some are handled in user space. This is only +available on book3s_64. + +3) OSI hypercalls + +Mac-on-Linux is another user of KVM on PowerPC, which has its own hypercall (long +before KVM). This is supported to maintain compatibility. All these hypercalls get +forwarded to user space. This is only useful on book3s_32, but can be used with +book3s_64 as well. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt index 77dfecf..a5f8436 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt @@ -3591,7 +3591,7 @@ Looking at the source shows that the fault happened during a call to - copy_to_user to copy the data into the kernel: + copy_from_user to copy the data into the kernel: 107 count -= chars; diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt index fa206cc..a68db769 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt @@ -197,12 +197,8 @@ the pages are also "rescued" from the unevictable list in the process of freeing them. page_evictable() also checks for mlocked pages by testing an additional page -flag, PG_mlocked (as wrapped by PageMlocked()). If the page is NOT mlocked, -and a non-NULL VMA is supplied, page_evictable() will check whether the VMA is -VM_LOCKED via is_mlocked_vma(). is_mlocked_vma() will SetPageMlocked() and -update the appropriate statistics if the vma is VM_LOCKED. This method allows -efficient "culling" of pages in the fault path that are being faulted in to -VM_LOCKED VMAs. +flag, PG_mlocked (as wrapped by PageMlocked()), which is set when a page is +faulted into a VM_LOCKED vma, or found in a vma being VM_LOCKED. VMSCAN'S HANDLING OF UNEVICTABLE PAGES @@ -371,8 +367,8 @@ mlock_fixup() filters several classes of "special" VMAs: mlock_fixup() will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs VMA range to allocate the huge pages and populate the ptes. -3) VMAs with VM_DONTEXPAND or VM_RESERVED are generally userspace mappings of - kernel pages, such as the VDSO page, relay channel pages, etc. These pages +3) VMAs with VM_DONTEXPAND are generally userspace mappings of kernel pages, + such as the VDSO page, relay channel pages, etc. These pages are inherently unevictable and are not managed on the LRU lists. mlock_fixup() treats these VMAs the same as hugetlbfs VMAs. It calls make_pages_present() to populate the ptes. @@ -651,7 +647,7 @@ PAGE RECLAIM IN shrink_*_list() ------------------------------- shrink_active_list() culls any obviously unevictable pages - i.e. -!page_evictable(page, NULL) - diverting these to the unevictable list. +!page_evictable(page) - diverting these to the unevictable list. However, shrink_active_list() only sees unevictable pages that made it onto the active/inactive lru lists. Note that these pages do not have PageUnevictable set - otherwise they would be on the unevictable list and shrink_active_list |
